FILE NO.

810-200882GR

SERVICE MANUAL

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION
15LV505

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.
This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green
product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

©2008 Toshiba Corporation

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN
(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling
and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any
marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.
Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation
recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to
enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,
Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,
parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.
Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in
manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer
products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in
the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING
This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F
(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made
with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great
care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially
when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat
required to melt lead-free solder is high.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT
• LEAD-FREE SOLDER
• TABLE OF CONTENTS
• OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION ..................................................................................................................................... A1-1

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING .................................................................................... A1-2
HOW TO ORDER PARTS .......................................................................................................... A1-2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ..................................................................................................... A1-3~A1-5
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ............................................................................................... A1-6
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................ A1-7
PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ................................................................................ A1-7
REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE .............................................................................................. A1-8
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................... A2-1~A2-8
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS ............................................. B1-1, B1-2
2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ..................................................................................... B2-1, B2-2
3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ................................................ B3-1, B3-2
SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................. C-1
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS ....................................................................................... C-2
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................ C-2
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ......................................................................... C-3
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................. D-1~D-5
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ..................................................................................................... E-1~E-9
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ........................................................................................................................................... F-1, F-2
POWER ..................................................................................................................................... F-3, F-4
POWER(DIGITAL PCB) .......................................................................................................... F-5, F-6
SIGNAL ..................................................................................................................................... F-7, F-8
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD MT ..................................................................................................................................... G-1, G-2
DIGITAL .................................................................................................................................... G-3, G-4
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW ................................................................................. G-5, G-6
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON ......................................................................................... G-7, G-8
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP ................................................................................................. H-1, H-2
MEMORY ................................................................................................................................... H-3, H-4
MOTOR DRIVE ......................................................................................................................... H-5, H-6
AUDIO/VIDEO .......................................................................................................................... H-7, H-8
MICON ....................................................................................................................................... H-9, H-10
SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO .......................................................................................................... H-11, H-12
TUNER ...................................................................................................................................... H-13, H-14
HDMI .......................................................................................................................................... H-15, H-16
LVDS .......................................................................................................................................... H-17, H-18
SCALER POWER ..................................................................................................................... H-19, H-20
FLASH ....................................................................................................................................... H-21, H-22
DDR ........................................................................................................................................... H-23, H-24
JACK .......................................................................................................................................... H-25, H-26
AV SWITCH .............................................................................................................................. H-27, H-28
REGULATOR ........................................................................................................................... H-29, H-30
POWER ..................................................................................................................................... H-31, H-32
BACKLIGHT INVERTER ......................................................................................................... H-33, H-34
SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................................ H-35, H-36
JACK OUT ................................................................................................................................ H-37, H-38
SW ............................................................................................................................................. H-39, H-40
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................ H-41, H-42
WAVEFORMS ............................................................................................................................... I-1, I-2
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................. J1-1~J1-3
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ................................................................................................... J2-1
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ........................................................................... K1-1
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .............................................................................. K2-1
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................ K3-1~K3-4
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions
in this manual and checking the section
“Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty
service for your LCD TV/DVD Combination,
contact TACP·s Consumer Solution Center toll
free at 1-800-631-3811.
(2) You must include a copy or original bill of
sale or other proof of purchase along with
the entire LCD TV/DVD Combination to the
Depot Warranty Repair Center specified by
the TACP Consumer Solutions Center. You
are responsible for all inbound transportation
and insurance charges for the LCD TV/DVD
Combination to the Depot Warranty Repair
Center specified by the TACP Consumer
Solutions Center.
For additional information, visit TACP·s website:
www.tacp.toshiba.com
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF
ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION
OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH
ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY
STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED,
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR
OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO
THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY
PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE
FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY
TO USE THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION).
ColorStream is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
J51T0101A SH 08/08 N
Dear Customer,
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV or TV/DVD
Combination television.
This manual will help you use the many exciting features of
your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV or TV/DVD
Combination, please read this manual completely, and keep it
nearby for future reference.
Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING
R I S K OF E LECTR IC S HOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,
do not use the polarized plug with an extension
cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades
can be inserted completely to prevent blade
exposure.
ENERGY STAR® qualified TV. Products that earn
the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas
emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency
guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of
Energy. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR
mark are registered U.S. marks.
NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention
to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper
grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of
cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information,
see item 26 on page 5.
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated
with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
2 3
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company
is authorized to change, modify, or extend
the terms of these warranties in any manner
whatsoever. The time within which an action must
be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP Introduction 4
arising under the warranty or under any statute
or law of the United States or any state thereof is
hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date
you discover, or should have discovered, the
defect. This limitation does not apply to implied 15-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD Connections 14
COMBINATION
warranties arising under state law.
Basic setup
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL 20
RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER
RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE
15LV505 TV operation 25
U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW
LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OWNER’S MANUAL Basic playback 42
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
Advanced playback 45
Function setup 57
Others 62
Owner·s Record
The model number and serial number
are on the back of your TV/DVD.
Record these numbers in the spaces
below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you communicate with your
©2008 Toshiba Corporation Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly. Model number:
Printed in Thailand *Screen size is approximate. Serial number:
FCC compliance information
CHILD SAFETY: CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE
OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.
FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):
It Makes A Difference How and Where You Use Your Flat
The Toshiba 15LV505 LCD TV/DVD Combination complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Panel Display
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Introduction
new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
The Issue 82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
• The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend Ph: (800) 631-3811 or visit TACP·s website at www.tacp.Toshiba.com
and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However, NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
or installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
• Flat panel displays that are
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
inappropriately situated on dressers,
bookcases, shelves, desks, television reception, which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to
speakers, chests or carts may fall try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
over and cause injury.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
TOSHIBA Cares! - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• The consumer electronics industry - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
is committed to making home CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user·s authority to operate this
entertainment enjoyable and safe. equipment.
Tune Into Safety
• One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations
for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display. CAUTION: Location of the required Marking
• Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM. The rating sheet and the safety caution are the rear of the unit.
proper use of this product. TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ
• Don’t allow children to climb on or play with furniture and THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR
television sets. FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE
• Don’t place flat panel displays on furniture MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE
that can easily be used as steps, such LOCATION.
as a chest of drawers. USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE
• Remember that children can
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
become excited while watching a MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
program, especially on a “larger
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, NEVER
than life” flat panel display. Care
OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE
should be taken to place or install
PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. NEVER STARE
the display where it cannot be
INTO BEAM. CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION
pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
• Care should be taken to route all cords and
cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be
pulled or grabbed by curious children.
ON DISPOSAL
Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your
flat panel display, always: The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental
• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the
manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
as UL, CSA, ETL).
• Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount
manufacturers.
• If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your
flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional
installation.
• Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is
appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted
to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction. If you
are unsure, contact a professional
installer.
• A minimum of two people are
required for installation. Flat panel
displays can be heavy.
Introduction
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Important Safety Instructions
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer·s instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
two blades and a third grounding prong.
The wide blade or the third prong Wide plug
are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked
on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged
in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Additional Safety Precautions
14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does
not operate normally, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power
cord to avoid possible electric shock or fire.
• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with
any broken glass or liquid from the damaged
television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains
glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact
with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by
broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly with
water and consult your doctor.
• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect
the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.
14b) WARNING: To prevent the spread of fire, keep
candles or other open flames away from this product
at all times.
4 5
Introduction
Precautions
Choosing a location for your LCD TV
Q To Display your LCD TV on the included Pedestal Stand:
Observe the following safety precautions:
1) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can
support the weight of the TV.
2) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall, pillar, surface, or
other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this
manner, use the included strap located at the rear of
pedestal stand. (see item 19, page 4).
Important notes about your LCD TV
The following symptoms are technical limitations of
LCD Display technology and are not an indication of
malfunction; therefore, Toshiba is not responsible for
perceived defects resulting from these symptoms.
1) An after image (ghost) may appear on the screen
if a fixed, non-moving image is displayed for a long
period of time. The after image is not permanent and
will disappear in a short period of time.
2) The LCD panel contained in this TV is manufactured
using an extremely high level of precision technology;
however, there may be an occasional pixel (dot of light)
that does not operate properly (does not light, remains
constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural property of
LCD technology, is not a sign of malfunction, and is
not covered under your warranty. Such pixels are
not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal
viewing distance.
Note: Interactive video games that involve shooting a
“gun” type of joystick at an on-screen target may not
work on this TV.
Notes on handling
Q Do not subject the LCD panel to physical shock, such
as dropping it. It may cause unit damage and malfunction.
Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton
and packing materials come in handy. For fully
protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed
at the factory.
Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide, near
the unit.
Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with
the unit for prolonged periods of time.
Doing so will leave marks on the finish.
Q The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm
after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.
Q When the unit is not in use, always remove the disc
and turn off the power.
Notes on locating the unit
Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR,
the playback picture may become poor and the sound
may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away
from the TV, radio, or VCR.
Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store
the TV/DVD in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or
areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.
6 7
Installation, Care, and Service
Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and
heed all warnings when installing your TV:
15) To avoid damage to this product, never place or
store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas;
or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.
16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user·s authority to
operate this equipment under the rules of the
Federal Communications Commission.
17) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Never place
the TV on an unstable cart,
stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing
serious personal injury, death, or serious
damage to the TV.
18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or
candles on top of the TV.
19) WARNING: Always place the TV on the floor or a
sturdy, level, stable Sturdy tie (as short as possible; min. 4 in.)
surface that can
Clip
support the weight
of the unit. To
Hooks
secure the TV, use a
sturdy strap from the Screw
hooks on the rear TV top
Band
of the TV pedestal TV side
to a wall stud, pillar
or other immovable structure. Make sure the strap is
tight, secure, and parallel to the floor.
20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing
liquid or place items such as vases, aquariums, any
other item filled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.
21) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV
cabinet back, bottom, and sides.
Never place the TV:
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;
• too close to drapes, curtains,
or walls; or
• in a confined space such as
a bookcase, built-in cabinet,
or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from
overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.
Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.
22) Always place the back of the television at least four
(4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a
wall) to allow proper ventilation.
23) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord
is subject to wear or abuse.
24) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
25) Always operate the TV with a 120V AC, 60Hz power source only.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the
polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet
unless the blades can be inserted completely with three-wire
grounding type to prevent blade exposure.
Notes on moisture condensation
Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please
read the following carefully.
Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you
pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day and drops
of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same
way, moisture may condense on this unit·s internal optical
pick-up lens, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.
le of mo
Examp ensat isture
cond ion!
Optical pick-up
lens
Q Moisture condensation may occur in the following
situations:
When you move the unit from a cold area to a warm area.
When you use the unit in a room in which the heat
was just turned on.
When you use the unit in an area where cold air from
an air conditioner directly hits the unit.
When you use the unit in a humid area.
Q Never use the unit when moisture condensation
may occur
Using the unit when moisture condensation exists may
damage discs and internal parts. Connect the power
cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit,
remove the disc, and leave it for two or three hours.
After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up
and evaporated any moisture. Leaving the TV
connected to the wall outlet will help prevent moisture
condensation in the TV or DVD Player.
Wa
it!
Wall outlet
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Continued)
Installation (cont. from previous page)
26) Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against
voltage surges and built-up static charges (see
Section 810 of the National Electric Code.)
Antenna
lead-in wire
Ground clamp
Antenna discharge unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Electric service
Grounding conductors
equipment
(NEC Section 810-21)
Ground clamps
Power service grounding
electrode system
(NEC Art 250 Part H)
27) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!
• Use extreme care to make sure you
are never in a position where your body
(or any item you are in contact with,
such as a ladder or screwdriver) can
accidentally touch overhead power lines.
Never locate the antenna near overhead
power lines or other electrical circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the following during
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,
wires, or any home theater component connected
to an antenna or phone system.
Care
For better performance and safer operation of your
TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
28) Always unplug the TV before cleaning.
Wipe the display panel
surface gently using only a
soft cloth (cotton, flannel,
etc.) A hard cloth may
damage the surface of the
panel. Avoid contact with
alcohol, thinner, benzene,
acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive
cleaners, or chemical cloths, which may damage
the surface. Never spray volatile compounds such
as insecticide on the cabinet. Such products may
damage or discolor the cabinet.
29) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never spill liquids or push objects of
any kind into the TV cabinet slots.
30) While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting
cables or apparatus.
31) For added protection of your TV from lightning and
power surges, always unplug the power cord and
disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the
TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.
Notes on discs
On handling discs
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in
figure below.
Playback side
Do not attach paper or tape to discs.
On cleaning discs
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc
clean.
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.
Structure of disc contents
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and
the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and
Audio CDs are divided into tracks.
DVD video disc
DVD video disc
Title 1 Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Video CD/Audio CD
Video CD/Audio CD
Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4
Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which
is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track
number” respectively.
There may be discs that do not have these numbers.
Care (cont. from previous column)
32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional
snap ping or popping sounds. This is normal,
especially when the unit is being turned on or off.
Introduction
If these sounds become frequent or continuous,
unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba
Authorized Service Center.
33) Keep your fingers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury.
34) When you use headphones, keep the volume at a
moderate level. Using headphones continuously
at a high volume may cause hearing damage.
35) NEVER look directly into the disc slot or ventilation
slots at the source of the laser beam. Doing so
may cause sight damage.
36) NEVER use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
Such discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury or product damage. SUCH DAMAGE
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY.
37) WARNING: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!
• Never strike the screen with a sharp or heavy
object.
• Never touch, press, or place anything on the
LCD screen. These actions will damage the LCD
screen If you need to clean the LCD screen,
follow the instructions in item 28 on this page.
Service
38) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never attempt to service the TV
yourself.
Opening and removing the covers
may expose you to dangerous voltage or other
hazards. Failure to follow this WARNING may
result in death or serious injury.
Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service
Center.
39) If you have the TV serviced:
• Ask the service technician to use only replacement
parts specified by the manufacturer.
• Upon completion of service, ask the service
technician to perform routine safety checks to
determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.
40) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,
ask a qualified service technician to properly
dispose of the TV.
Notes on copyright
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision
of copyrighted materials including, without limitation,
Introduction
television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited
under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.
About this owner·s manual
This owner·s manual explains the basic instructions of this
unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner
that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As
such, the unit may not respond to all operating command.
This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of
discs.
The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during
operation.
It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/DVD
or the disc.
For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback
of copyright message of the disc when the STOP (Q)
button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also
indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.
Notes on region numbers
The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers,
which stand for their playable area, are printed on your
DVD video disc and you do not find 1 or ALL , disc
playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case,
the unit will display a message on-screen.)
Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be
subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable.
On Video CDs
This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC
(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of
Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations
depending on types of discs.
• Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)
Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the same
way as a DVD.
• Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0)
In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with
the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive
software with search function by using the menu
displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of
the functions described in this owner·s manual may not
work with some discs.
Track 5
Introduction

Notes on discs (Continued) Contents

Introduction Basic playback
Playable discs
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS................................ 4 Playing a disc ................................................. 42
This unit can play the following discs. Precautions....................................................... 6

Introduction
Disc Maximum Notes on discs .................................................. 7 Advanced playback
Disc Mark Contents
Size playback time Contents ........................................................... 9 Zooming.......................................................... 45
Approx. 4 hours Identification of controls ..................................10
(single sided disc)
Locating desired scene................................... 45
Audio 12 cm Marking desired scenes.................................. 46
Approx. 8 hours
DVD +
video Video
(double sided disc) Connections Repeat playback ............................................. 47
discs (moving Approx. 80 minutes
Antenna connections ...................................... 14 A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 47
pictures) (single sided disc)
8 cm Cable TV connections .................................... 15 Program playback........................................... 48
Approx. 160 minutes
(double sided disc) Connecting to optional equipment .................. 16 Random playback ........................................... 48
Audio Approx. 74 minutes Power source.................................................. 19 Changing angles..............................................49
12 cm Title selection ...................................................49
+ (single sided disc)
Video
Video DVD menu .......................................................49
CDs
DIGITAL VIDEO (moving
8 cm
Approx. 20 minutes Basic setup Changing soundtrack language .......................50
pictures) (single sided disc)
Auto setup ...................................................... 20 Subtitles ...........................................................50
Approx. 74 minutes
Audio
12 cm
(single sided disc) Setting the language....................................... 21 Disc status .......................................................51
Audio
CDs Approx. 20 minutes To memorize channels.................................... 22 To turn off the PBC ..........................................51
8 cm
(single sided disc)
MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation ......52
The following discs are also available.
TV operation Repeat, random and program playback
DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format
CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA or TV operation ................................................... 25 using file browser.............................................55
JPEG format Labeling channels........................................... 27
Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format Labeling video inputs ...................................... 28 Function setup
Some of these discs may be incompatible. Setting the V-Chip........................................... 29 Customizing the function settings ....................57
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above. Setting the closed captions............................. 33 Temporary cancel the rating level
• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CD- CC advanced .................................................. 34
ROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even by DVD disc .....................................................61
if they may be labeled as above. Adjusting the picture preference ..................... 35
• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending Picture settings ............................................... 35 Others
on the recording conditions. Viewing the wide-screen picture formats ........ 36
• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot
Film Mode ....................................................... 37 Understanding the Power Return feature ........62
play DVD video discs recorded in any other color Troubleshooting ...............................................62
system (PAL, SECAM, etc.). DNR ................................................................ 37
• This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a Sound control adjustment ............................... 38 Reception disturbances ...................................64
disc adapter. It may cause trouble. Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) .... 38 Language code list ..........................................65
• Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into Specifications ..................................................66
the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.
Selecting the audio language ......................... 39
Using the aspect feature................................. 40 Limited United States Warranty .......................67
You may not be able to remove it.
• Please do not use after market accessories, such as a Adjusting the back lighting .............................. 40
ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the Setting the Auto Shut Off ................................ 41
operation of the unit.
Resetting your settings ................................... 41
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the
creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the
DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play
every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos.
If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a DVD
and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV,
please contact Toshiba Customer Service.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.

8 9

Introduction

Identification of controls

Introduction
Front Rear

AC INPUT
cover 19

Speaker

Remote sensor 13 POWER indicator 20

Side Top

CH 25 / QSTOP button 42 CH 25 / PLAY button 42

MENU button 21 57
VOLUME (+/–) buttons 25
INPUT/ENTER button 16
EJECT button 43
POWER button 20
AC INPUT 19 Antenna jack 14 15
Disc slot 42
COLORSTREAM HD IN jacks 17 COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack 18 19

VIDEO/GAME IN jack 16 17 HEAD PHONE jack 26

10 11
Introduction

Identification of controls (Continued)

Introduction
Remote control Inserting batteries
The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.
1 Open the battery compartment
cover in the direction of the
2 Install two “R03/AAA” batteries
(supplied), paying attention to
3 Replace the compartment
cover.
arrow. the polarity indicated in the
battery compartment.

EJECT button 43 POWER button 20 42

TV/DVD button 42 SLEEP button 26
Direct channel selection
buttons (0-9) 25
Numbered buttons (0-9) 29

JUMP button 45
DISPLAY button 26 51
Direct channel selection button ( ) 25
CH / button 25
SUBTITLE button 50 AUDIO SELECT button 50
VOL +/– button 25
Operation
INPUT button 16 MUTE button 26
ZOOM button 45
• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.
PLAY MODE button 47 48 51 *DVD MENU button 49 • Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.
ENTER button 20
PLAY button 42
Direction buttons ( / / / ) 20
MENU button 21
SETUP button 57 EXIT/CANCEL button 20
PAUSE button 43
CH RTN button 26 STOP button 42
SKIP ( ) button 44 CLOSED CAPTION button 33
SKIP ( )button 44
REV button 44
FF button 44 SLOW ( ) button 44 Approx. 5 meters
SLOW ( ) button 44 MARKER button 46
TOP MENU button 49 ANGLE button 49
RETURN button 53 57 REPEAT A-B button 47
GAME button 16 PIC SIZE button 36 Caution:
• Never throw batteries into a fire.

Note:
SE-R0305 • Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with
applicable laws and regulations.
*DVD MENU button • If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with
Use the DVD MENU button to new ones.
display the menu included on • When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
many DVD video discs. Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.
To operate a menu, follow the • Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended
instructions in “DVD menu.” 49 period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

12 13

Connections

Antenna connections Cable TV connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system. This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box.
If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see 15 for Cable TV connections. Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for
normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire) For subscribers to basic cable TV service

Antenna For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination jack

Connections
Antenna
box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the
Antenna VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back
jack Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.
jack
of the TV/DVD.
75 ohm
If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300 coaxial cable
75 ohm coaxial cable ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching
(not supplied) transformer (not supplied).

300-75 ohm matching

transformer (not supplied)
For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service
If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the
incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect
the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections
shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4)
Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires) and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

Antenna Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the

jack 300-75 ohm matching combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm Antenna
transformer (not supplied) twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer Incoming 75 ohm 75 ohm cable to jack
Cable TV TV/DVD
(not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner, Converter/
then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the descrambler
back of the TV/DVD.
Combiner
(not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm VHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire twin-lead wire
(not supplied) For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled
(not supplied)
premium channels
If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require
Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires) the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available
from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in
the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A”
Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the
Antenna twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied). converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.
jack Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back
of the TV/DVD.
VHF 75 ohm Converter/
(not supplied) Incoming descrambler
75 ohm 75 ohm cable Antenna
jack
Combiner Cable TV to TV/DVD
Splitter A/B switch A
(not supplied) B

UHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire
(not supplied)

14 15
Connections

Connecting to optional equipment 0-3

CH /
You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input.
INPUT

GAME

Using the audio/video inputs Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output
Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV/DVD, such Source Selection
If you connect a VCR with an S-Video cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must
as a VCR player. You can select TV, Video or ColorStream HD depending on which 0.TV
also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN jacks as shown below. The S-Video cable only carries the video
input jacks you used to connect your devices. 1.Video
signal. The audio signal is separated.

Connections
2.ColorStream HD
3.DVD
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
Press INPUT on the remote control to display the current signal source.
To change the input source, press INPUT again or press 0-2. (3 is for selection DVD To S-VIDEO IN Back side
mode.) [0-3]:Select (white)
: Signal flow
Ex. VCR with S-Video
Connecting to a VCR
(playback)
To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly. (red) To VIDEO/GAME IN
Back side To Audio (L/R) OUT To S-VIDEO OUT
: Signal flow VCR (yellow)
(white)
S-Video cable (not supplied)
(red) To AUDIO (L/R) IN
To VIDEO/GAME IN Audio cable (not supplied)
To Audio/Video OUT
Note:
Audio/Video cable (not supplied) • When the S-Video cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes
precedence.

Connecting to a camcorder Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream® (Component video) output
To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown.
Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly. Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component
video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream® can greatly enhance picture
: Signal flow (yellow)
Back side quality and performance.
Camcorder (white)
Select the “ColorStream HD” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.
(red) Back side
To VIDEO/GAME IN Ex. DVD player with Component video
To Audio/Video OUT
Audio/Video cable (not supplied)
: Signal flow To COLORSTREAM HD
(Y, PB, PR) IN

Connecting to a TV Game To Component Video OUT

To Audio (L/R) OUT
Component video cable
You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to the suitable brightness for your eyes. (not supplied)
1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD. (white) (red)
2. Select the Game mode by pressing GAME. The Game mode screen appears. Audio cable (not supplied) To COLORSTREAM HD
• If GAME is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen AUDIO (L/R) IN
appears on the screen.
Back side When using the Component video cable,
: Signal flow (yellow)
(white) an Audio cable must be connected to
COLORSTREAM HD AUDIO(L/R) IN jacks.
To Audio/Video OUT (red) To VIDEO/GAME IN
Note:
Audio/Video cable (not supplied) • The ColorStream® (component video) inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i, 1080i inter-
laced signals and 480p, 720p progressive signals.
Note: • Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• You can also change the TV/DVD screen to the desired mode by pressing the CH / . • When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment
• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of from the wall outlet before making any connections.
different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all • If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the
been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You·ll need to consult each component·s Owner·s Manual
for additional information. unit away from the tuner and radio.
• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this
TV/DVD.
16 17

Connections

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued) Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the * This section uses the following reference mark.
TV/DVD to optional audio equipment. Power source
: Front speaker : Center speaker
: Rear speaker : Signal flow
: Sub woofer

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input
Dolby Digital 2 channel digital stereo

Connections
Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker
this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital system (right and left front speakers).
Note: PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback. Back side
recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby
Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full benefit of To COAXIAL DIGITAL
Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the Amplifier equipped with a AUDIO OUT
Digital audio input
Dolby Surround mark.
Back side To COAXIAL
To COAXIAL DIGITAL type digital
Amplifier equipped with a AUDIO OUT audio input
Dolby Digital decoder
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
To COAXIAL
type digital Manufactured under license Note:
audio input from Dolby Laboratories. • DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.
Dolby and the double-D symbol This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) are trademarks of Dolby of the TV/DVD.
Laboratories. • Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet
before making any connections.
• The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver·s volume to a moderate listening level.
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS® decoder Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD·s power cord. If you leave the amplifier·s power on, the speakers
Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be damaged.
DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD Power source
video discs or audio CDs.
Back side
To COAXIAL DIGITAL To use AC power source
AUDIO OUT 1. Open the AC INPUT cover.
Amplifier equipped with 2. Connect the AC cord plug into this TV/DVD’s AC INPUT jack, then close the AC INPUT cover.
a DTS decoder Manufactured under license 3. Connect the AC cord into an AC outlet.
under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 &
To COAXIAL other U.S. and worldwide
type digital patents issued & pending. DTS
and DTS Digital Out are AC Outlet
audio input
registered trademarks and the Wider Hole
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) DTS logos and Symbol are and Blade
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

MPEG2 sound
You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic AC 120V, 60Hz
realistic sound by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

Back side
AC cord (supplied)
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
Amplifier equipped with an AUDIO OUT
MPEG2 audio decoder Note:
• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.
To COAXIAL • If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s
type digital responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.
audio input • If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied) and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.
• If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before pressing POWER.

18 19
Basic setup

Auto Setup POWER

Setting the language POWER

The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily. This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, French or
It leads you the Language selection, Air/Cable selection and Automatic Spanish.
channel search. Select the language you prefer first, then proceed with the other menu options.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system MENU
connection is made!
ENTER ENTER
/ / / / / /
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL

Auto Setup Setting the language

To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER. To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER. Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language:
1 5 Now the “Automatic Search” starts.
1 4

Basic setup
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit • POWER indicator on the front of the unit English, French (Français) or Spanish
Auto Setup
changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds (Español).
Language English
for a picture to appear on screen. for a picture to appear on screen.
Signal Type Cable
Automatic Search Start

Analog Channel Found : 0

Digtal Channel Found : 0

Auto Setup menu appears on the screen. Press MENU. The TV menu screen will
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired language. • If you press EXIT/CANCEL, the Automatic
EXIT : End
2 appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Setup”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Setup Search stops and changes to the TV screen.
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
Language
Signal Type
Automatic Search
English
Cable
Start
• After the starting setup is completed, the TV
channel appears on the screen.
Main Menu

Picture
5 screen.

Audio

Note: Channel

• The Auto Setup function will work only when you Lock

press POWER for the first time. Setup Note:

: Select
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”, then
: Adjust
• The process of “Automatic Search” may take 15 to • If the unit does not operate properly, or No key
: Select ENTER:Set
30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional operation (by the unit and/or the remote control):
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s

3 press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

Auto Setup
cable service.

3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”.
operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once,
then connect it again.
• If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60
Language English Setup
seconds, the MENU screen will return to normal
Signal Type Cable operation automatically.
Closed Caption >>
Automatic Search Start • The TV section has its own menu and the DVD
Language English
Video Label >>
section also has its own menu 57 .
Backlight 16
Auto Shut Off Off
Aspect On
: Select : Adjust Reset >>
: Select : Adjust

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

Auto Setup
Language English
Signal Type Cable
Automatic Search Start

: Select ENTER:Set

20 21

Basic setup

To memorize channels
This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows
channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping
over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be
programmed into the TV/DVD·s memory. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna,
set the Signal Type option to the Air mode. When shipped from the factory, this ENTER
ENTER
menu option is in the Cable mode.
/ / / / / /
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU

Air/Cable selection Automatic search Add/Delete channel

Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu You can select the channel that you want to skip.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
1

Basic setup
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu
1
Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 want to skip.
Add/Delete

Picture Picture CH Signal

Main Menu
Audio 2 Analog Add
Audio
Picture 3 Analog Add
Channel Channel
3-001 Digital Delete
Audio
Lock Lock 3-002 Digital Add
Channel
Setup Setup 4 Analog Delete
Lock
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set
Setup : Select : Adjust

: Select ENTER:Set

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.
2
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
5
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Add” or “Delete”,
whichever function you want to perform.

Channel
Add/Delete >>
Channel
Add/Delete >>
2 press ϶ or ENTER.
Channel
Add/Delete
CH Signal
Auto Ch Memory >> 2 Analog Delete
Auto Ch Memory >> Add/Delete >> 3 Analog Add
Ch Label >>
Ch Label >> Auto Ch Memory >> 3-001 Digital Delete
Ch Label >> 3-002 Digital Add
4 Analog Delete

3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”.

: Select ENTER:Set

: Select ENTER:Set
: Select : Adjust

Repeat steps 4 - 5 for other channels you

Auto Ch Memory
Signal Type Cable
3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Auto Ch Memory 3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
6 want to add or delete.

Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

7
Automatic Search Start
Add/Delete
Signal Type Cable screen.
Automatic Search Stop Adding Channel >>
Add/Delete >>
Clear All >>

4 Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

Auto Ch Memory
Analog Channel Found : 0
Digital Channel Found : 0

: Select ENTER:Cancel
Signal Type Air : Select ENTER:Set
Automatic Search Start
The TV/DVD will begin memorizing all the
4 channels available in your area.

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable - Cable TV channels

5 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

22 23
Basic setup TV operation

POWER
To memorize channels (Continued) TV operation
0–9, –

VOL +/–
ENTER CH /
/ /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

Adding Channel Clear All TV operation

If you find a new channel unregistered, you can add the All channels are deleted from the channel memory. To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.
new channel into the channel memory.

Tune in the new channel.

1 (POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture
TO SELECT ANALOG CHANNELS
1-9: Press 1-9 as needed. Example, to
select channel 2, press 2.

1 1
Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
to appear on screen.) 10-99: Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to
select channel 12, press 1, 2.

TV operation
“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER. 100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to
Press MENU. The TV menu screen will appear.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Channel”, then press
϶ or ENTER.
Main Menu
Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL + or – .
select channel 120, press 1, 2, 0.

Main Menu
Picture
Audio
Channel
2 The volume level will be indicated on the screen
by orange bars. As the volume level increases, so
TO SELECT DIGITAL CHANNELS
Press the first 3 digits, then press the – button,
followed by the remaining number.
do the number of bars. If the volume decreases, Example, to select channel 015-001, press 0, 1,
Lock
Picture the number of orange bars also decreases. 5, –, 0, 0, 1.
Setup
Audio • If a channel is selected with only audio content,
Channel : Select ENTER:Set “Audio only” will be displayed on the screen.
Lock • If a channel is selected with a weak digital
Setup signal, “Digital channel signal strength is low”
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
: Select ENTER:Set

2 press ϶ or ENTER.
Set the Signal Type option to the appropriate
will be displayed on the screen.
The same program may be available on either
an analog channel or a digital channel. You may

3
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
Channel
Add/Delete
Auto Ch Memory
>>
>>
3 position (see “Air/Cable selection” 22 ). choose to watch either format.
• If a channel is selected to which you have not
Ch Label >>
subscribed, “Digital channel is encrypted” will
Channel Air - VHF/UHF channels be displayed on the screen.
Add/Delete >> Cable - Cable TV channels
Auto Ch Memory >>
Ch Label >>
VHF/UHF/CABLE CHANNELS
Press the Direct Channel Selection (0-9, –)
: Select

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Clear All”, then press

ENTER:Set

4 buttons or CH / to select the channel.

(If you press only channel number, channel
Air
VHF VHF
Cable

: Select ENTER:Set
3 ϶ or ENTER.
Add/Delete
selection will be delayed for a few seconds.) 2-13
UHF
14-69
2-13
STD/HRC/IRC
14-36 (A) (W)
Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Adding Channel”,
4 then press ϶ or ENTER. The new channel will
be added into the channel memory.
Adding Channel
Add/Delete
Clear All
>>
>>
>>
37-59
60-85
86-94
(AA) (WW)
(AAA) (ZZZ)
(86) (94)
Add/Delete 95-99 (A-5) (A-1)
100-125 (100) (125)
Adding Channel >>
Add/Delete >>
01 (5A)
Clear All >> : Select ENTER:Set

Note:
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal • If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound

: Select ENTER:Set
4 screen. will automatically be muted.
• It may take a few seconds for a digital channel picture
to appear on screen after being selected.
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
5 screen.

24 25

TV operation

TV operation (Continued) SLEEP

Labeling channels
Channel label appear with the channel number display each time you turn on the
DISPLAY TV/DVD, select a channel, or press DISPLAY.
VOL +/– You can choose any four characters to identify a channel.
MUTE
ENTER
CH RTN / / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

TV operation (continued)
Labeling channels
Ϯ DISPLAY Ϯ SLEEP

1 4
S l e e p Ti m e r
Press DISPLAY to display the current information on the To set the TV/DVD to 0h 10m Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu Press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until the character
screen. turn off after a preset screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select you want appears in the first space.
amount of time, press “Channel” menu, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Ch Label
SLEEP on the remote

TV operation
control. The clock will Main Menu
Channel Number 15-1
count up 10 minutes for Ch Label A
62-001 HDTV Moving Picture1 Sleep Timer
Off each press of the SLEEP button (Off, 0h 10m, 0h 20m, Picture Label Clear >>
CH-1
Digital Air English

No Program Information is available

..., 2h 0m). After the sleep time is programmed, the Audio
When the TV/DVD display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind Channel
receives a digital signal, you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the Lock
the digital information Natural sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining Setup : Select : Adjust ENTER:Set
1080i

will appear. time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the
: Select ENTER:Set
sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display The characters rotation as follows:
• Channel number • Station name
turns to Off.
• Channel label (if preset) • Broadcast program name , () @ / + = -
-
• V-Chip rating • Signal type
• Sleep timer
• Program guide
• Resolution
•
•
Audio language
Picture size
Ϯ HEAD PHONES
Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini
plug into the HEAD PHONE jack on the rear panel.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Ch Label”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The “Ch Label” menu will appear.
SPACE

If the character which you desire appears, press

14 Sleep Timer
Off
If you connect headphones, the sound from TV/DVD Channel ENTER.
Analog Cable
speakers is muted. Add/Delete >> Repeat this step to enter the rest of the
When the TV/DVD Auto Ch Memory >> characters.
Ch Label >>
receives a analog signal, If you would like a blank space in the label name,
the analog information Natural
480i
you must choose the empty space from the list of
will appear. characters.
• Channel number • Channel label (if preset)

5 When you finish inputting the label name,

: Select ENTER:Set
• V-Chip rating • Signal type
• Sleep timer • Audio information (Stereo or SAP) press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
• Picture size • Resolution
Press DISPLAY again to clear the call display.
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select a channel you want to
label, then press ϴ.
Ch Label
screen.

Note:
Channel Number 15-1
• After a few seconds, DISPLAY screen will return to Ch Label
normal TV-operation automatically.
Ϯ CH RTN
This button allows you to go back to the last channel
Label Clear >>
6 Repeat steps 3-5 for other channel. You can
assign a label to each channel.

selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to

return to the last channel you were watching. To clear a Ch Label
: Select : Adjust
After step 3 above, press ϳ or ϴ to select “Label Clear”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
Note:
• The channel labels will be reset after “Automatic
Ϯ MUTE
Search” 22 .
Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s
sound will be silenced and “Mute” will appear on the
screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing
this button again or the VOL + or –.

26 27
TV operation

Labeling video inputs Setting the V-Chip

The Video Label feature allows you to label each input source for your TV/DVD. An age limitation can be set to restrict children from viewing or hearing 0–9
violent scenes or pictures that you may choose to exclude. The restriction
applies to “TV Rating” and “Movie Rating” if this data is transmitted. You may DISPLAY
set this restriction separately. To use the V-Chip function, you must register
a password. ENTER
ENTER Notes:
/ /
/ / / If you forget the password, press DISPLAY four times within
five seconds while the TV is in password entering mode. This
EXIT/CANCEL MENU
allows you to reset your password.
MENU

Labeling video inputs To register a password To change a password

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired label for
that input source. 1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
Video Label
Main Menu

TV operation
Video -
Main Menu Main Menu
ColorStream HD SAT Picture
Picture Picture Audio
Audio Audio Channel
Channel Channel Lock
Lock Lock Setup
Setup : Select : Adjust Setup
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set

– : Uses the default label name

VCR : Video cassette recorder

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Video Label”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.
DVD
DTV
SAT
: DVD video
: Digital TV set-top box
: Satellite box
2 Select and enter your password (4 digits)
using Number buttons (0-9), then press
ENTER.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Change Password”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Change Password screen will appear.
Setup CBL : Cable box
Lock Lock
Closed Caption >>
Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
Language
Video Label
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
16
English
>>

Off
5 screen.
New Password ---- V-Chip
V-Chip Set
V-Chip Set (DTV)
Update
Off
>>
>>
>>
Aspect On Change Password >>
Reset >>
: Select ENTER:Set
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER: Set

3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select an input which you

want to label.
3 Enter the same password again to confirm,
then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new password using Number buttons
(0-9), then press ENTER.
Video Label The password is now registered.
Change Password
Video - Lock
ColorStream HD - New Password ----
Confirm Password ---- Confirm Password ----

: Select : Adjust
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set

Note:
• The V-Chip feature is available only for the U.S. V-Chip
4 Enter the same password again to confirm,
then press ENTER.
The new password is now registered.
system. The Canadian V-Chip system is not supported.

28 29

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

0–9

MUTE
ENTER ENTER
/ / / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU

To set the V-Chip

1
Movie Rating
Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The V-Chip Set Menu appears. Movie Rating
G
Lock

TV operation
PG
Main Menu V-Chip On PG-13
V-Chip Set >> R
Picture
V-Chip Set (DTV) >> NC-17
Audio
Update >> X
Channel
Change Password >>
Lock
: Select ENTER:Set
Setup

: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER: Set

G : All ages

5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select which rating will be

used, then press ϶ or ENTER. Each rating
PG
PG-13
: Parental guidance
: Parental guidance less than 13 years old

2 Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-

word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.
below will appear.
V-Chip Set
R : Under 17 years old parental guidance
suggested
NC-17 : 17 years old and above
Lock TV Rating >> X : Adult only
Movie Rating >>

6
Password ---- Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired rating, then
press ENTER.

: Select ENTER: Set

TV Rating
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set
TV Rating

3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip”, then press ALL D L S V FV

TV-Y
ϵ or ϶ to select “On” .
TV-Y7
TV-G
Lock
V-Chip
V-Chip Set
On
>>
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
7 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

V-Chip Set (DTV) >> : Select ENTER:Set

Update >>
Change Password >> You can set the rating using age level and genre.
Age:
TV-Y : All children To use the TV/DVD after it is protected.
: Select : Adjust
TV-Y7 : 7 years old and above When a program is received that is blocked by the V-
TV-G : General audience Chip, press MUTE, then enter your password.
TV-PG : Parental guidance
TV-14 : 14 years old and above The protection will be temporarily overridden. If the TV/
TV-MA : 17 years old and above DVD is turned off or the channel is changed, the V-Chip
restriction will be reactivated.
Genre:
ALL : All
D : Dialogue Note:
L : Language • The V-Chip function is activated only on programs and
S : Sex input sources that include a rating signal.
V : Violence
FV : Fantasy Violence

30 31
TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued) Setting the closed captions

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your television will 0–9 WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?
be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned
available in the future. television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for
hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another
ENTER language. ENTER
/ / / / /
EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU
CLOSED CAPTION

To download the additional V-Chip rating system (when available) Setting the closed captions

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
6 You also need “Update” procedure to update
rating information. 1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER. 4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Analog Caption” or
“Digital Caption”, then press ϵ or ϶ to select
the desired Closed Caption mode.

TV operation
When you select “Analog Caption”, you can
Note: Main Menu
Main Menu choose C1, C2, C3, C4, T1, T2, T3 and T4.
• You can only download the additional V-Chip rating Picture
Picture system when your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal. When you select “Digital Caption”, you can
Audio
Audio • When you download the additional rating system, it choose from CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5 and CS6.
Channel
Channel may take some time for the download to occur. Lock Closed Caption
Lock • The V-Chip rating information and system are not Setup
determined or controlled by the TV/DVD. CC Setting On
Setup
: Select ENTER:Set CC Priority Digital CC
: Select ENTER:Set
• The standard V-Chip rating system is available Analog Caption C1
whether your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal or Digital Caption CS1
not, and will block both analog and digital programs. Digital CC Preset Default

2 Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-

word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will
appear.
To set the restriction level using the standard V-Chip
rating system, select “V-Chip Set” in step 3.
• The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,
then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Closed Caption menu will appear.
CC Advanced

: Select : Adjust
>>

technology, and availability, content, and format may

Setup
Lock
Password ----
vary.
• You cannot select this feature if the TV/DVD is not
receiving a digital signal for the current station.
Closed Caption
Language
Video Label
>>
English
>>
5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Priority”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “Digital CC” or “Analog
CC”.
Backlight 16
Auto Shut Off Off
Aspect On
Reset >>

: Select ENTER:Set
[0-9] : Select ENTER:Set

3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set (DTV)”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Setting”, then
press ϵ or ϶ to select “On”.
On: Captions will be displayed on the screen. Note:
Off: Captions will not be displayed on the screen. • Depending on the broadcast signal, some
Lock
Analog Captions will function with a Digital
V-Chip On Closed Caption broadcast signal. This step prevent that two kind
V-Chip Set >>
CC Setting Off of captions are overlapping.
V-Chip Set (DTV) >>
CC Priority Digital CC
Update >>
Change Password >>
Analog Caption
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CC Advanced
C1
CS1
Default
>>
6 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

: Select ENTER:Set

: Select : Adjust

4 If the TV/DVD is not storing the additional

rating system, the TV/DVD will begin down-
loading it, which may take some time to be
Note:
• You can also display the Closed Caption menu screen by pressing CLOSED CAPTION on the remote control.
completed.
• Digital caption feature is not available for analog channel.

5 Set your preferred content rating limits for the

additional rating system.
Important Note:
If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set
“CC Setting” to “Off”.

32 33

TV operation

CC advanced Adjusting the picture preference/

When you have selected Custom as the display method, you can adjust the
various setting listed below as follows: Picture settings
You can select four picture modes—Sports, Standard, Movie and Memory—
This feature is designed to customize Digital Captions only. as described in the following table:
ENTER Picture settings are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as ENTER
/ / / follows: / / /
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU

CC advanced Adjusting the picture preference Picture settings

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to

select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER. 5 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired item,
then press ϵ or ϶ to change the setting. 1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
CC Advanced
Main Menu
Text Size Auto Main Menu
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Setting”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.

TV operation
Picture Text Type Auto

Audio
Text Edge Auto Picture The Picture Setting menu will appear.
Text Color Auto
Channel Audio
Text Opacity Auto Picture
Lock Background Color Auto
Channel
Background Opacity Auto Lock Picture Setting >>
Setup
: Select : Adjust Setup Picture Preference Sports
: Select ENTER:Set Picture Size >>
You can select from among the following items : Select ENTER:Set Film Mode On
DNR On
and parameters.

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.
The Closed Caption menu will appear.
Text Size:
Text Type:
Auto, Small, Standard, Large
Auto, Style1, Style2, Style3,
Style4, Style5, Style6, Style7 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Preference”. : Select ENTER:Set

Setup
Closed Caption >>
Text Edge: Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,
Uniform, Left Shadow, Right
Shadow
Picture
Picture Setting >>
3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to
adjust. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.
Language English Picture Setting
Text Color: Picture Preference Sports
Video Label >> Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Picture Size >> Brightness 25
Backlight 16
Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan Film Mode On Contrast 50
Auto Shut Off Off
Aspect On Text Opacity: Auto, Solid, Transparent, DNR On Sharpness 25
Color 25
Reset >> Translucent, Flashing Tint 0
: Select ENTER:Set
Background Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, : Select : Adjust Color Temperature Cool
Color: Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

3 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Digital CC Preset”,

then press ϵ or ϶ to select “Custom”.
Background Auto, Solid, Transparent,
Opacity: Translucent, Flashing
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select a mode you want to
adjust. ϵ
: Select : Adjust

϶
ENTER:Set

Closed Caption Brightness decrease increase

CC Setting
CC Priority
Analog Caption
On
Digital CC
C1
6 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.
Picture
Picture Setting
Picture Preference
>>
Standard
Contrast
brightness
decrease
contrast
brightness
increase
contrast
Digital Caption CS1 Picture Size >>
Digital CC Preset Custom Film Mode On Sharpness makes picture makes picture
CC Advanced >> DNR On softer clearer
: Select : Adjust Color be pale color be brilliant color
Note:
• You cannnot select “CC Advanced” in the menu
: Select : Adjust Tint be reddish color be greenish
color
4 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Advanced”, then
press ϶ or ENTER.
The CC Advanced menu will appear.
before set “Digital CC preset” to “Custom”.
• You cannot set the Closed Caption “Text Color” and
“Background Color” as the same color.
Mode
Sports
Picture Quality
Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set)
Color Temperature
Cool
Picture Quality
Bluish
Standard Standard picture quality (factory-set)
Closed Caption Standard Neutral
Movie Movie-like picture setting (factory-set)
CC Setting On Warm Reddish
CC Priority Digital CC Memory Your personal preferences (set by
Analog Caption C1 you; see “Picture settings” at right).
Digital Caption
Digital CC Preset
CS1
Custom
4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen.
CC Advanced

: Select
>>

ENTER:Set
4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/
CANCEL to return to the normal screen. Note:
• The Contrast default setting is set to maximum at the
factory.

34 35
TV operation

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats 0-4

Film Mode/DNR
You can view programs in a variety of picture sizes— Natural, Theather A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film Mode to “On” when
Wide1, Theather Wide2, Theather Wide3 and Full. you view a DVD.

MENU DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) can reduce the roughness of the picture.
ENTER (This function is available only for analog broadcast.)
/ / ENTER
/ / /
EXIT/CANCEL
EXIT/CANCEL
PIC SIZE MENU

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats Film Mode DNR

1 Press MENU. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.
Theater Wide2 picture size (for letter box
programs)
The entire picture is uniformly enlarged—it is stretched
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Size”, then the same amount both wider and taller (retains its Main Menu
Main Menu
press ϶ or ENTER to display Picture Size original proportion). Picture

TV operation
menu. Press ϳ/ϴ or corresponding Number Picture Audio
button (0-4) to select the desired picture size, The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.
Audio Channel
as described below. Channel Lock
Lock Setup
Picture Size
Setup
: Select ENTER:Set
0.Natural
: Select ENTER:Set
1.Theater Wide1 ABCDEFG----------------
2.Theater Wide2
3.Theater Wide3
Theater Wide3 picture size (for letter box programs

2
4.Full
with subtitles) Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DNR”.

[0-4]:Select
To fill the width of the screen, it is extended horizontally.
However; it is only slightly extended at the top and the
bottom.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Film Mode”.

Picture
Picture
Note: The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden. Picture Setting >>
Picture Setting >> Picture Preference Sports
• Selectable picture sizes may vary depending on the Picture Size >>
Picture Preference Sports
input source or broadcast signal. Picture Size >> Film Mode On
• Picture Size menu also can be displayed by pressing Film Mode On DNR On
PIC SIZE on the remote control. DNR On

3 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.
ABCDEFG----------------
ABCDEFG--------------------------

Full picture size (for 16:9 source programs)

: Select : Adjust
: Select : Adjust

Natural picture size

In some cases, this image will display the size of
Full will display the picture at the maximum size.
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”. 3 Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

standard 4:3 with a black side bar. Picture

Picture
Picture Setting >>
Picture Setting >> Picture Preference Sports
Picture Preference Sports Picture Size >>
Picture Size >> Film Mode On
Film Mode Off DNR Off
Note: DNR On
• Some High Definition and/or Digital broadcasts may
not allow you to change the picture size. : Select : Adjust
• In 720p or 1080i signal, only the Theater Wide2 and : Select : Adjust
Theater Wide1 picture size (for 4:3 format Full picture size features are available.
programs)
To fill the screen, the right and left edges are extended,
however; the center of the picture remains near its
former ratio.
4 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Note:
• A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film
Mode to “On” when you view a DVD from the DVD player
connected with ColorStream (component video) inputs.

36 37

TV operation

Sound control adjustment/ Selecting the audio language 0-6

When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can
Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) select one of the audio language. (This function is available only for digital
The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature provides high-fidelity stereo sound. DISPLAY broadcast.)
MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second
language or other audio information. ENTER ENTER
When the TV/DVD receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word “Stereo” or
/ / / / / /
“SAP” displays on-screen every time you press DISPLAY.
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU

Sound control adjustment Selecting Stereo/Second Selecting the audio language

Audio Program (SAP)

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to
select “Audio”, then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or
ϴ to select “Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER. 3 Press ϳ/ϴ or Number buttons (0-6) to select
your desired language.

Main Menu Audio Language

Main Menu

TV operation
Main Menu Picture 0. English
Picture 1. Language 1
Audio
Audio Picture 2. Language 2
Channel 3. French
Channel Audio
Lock 4. Language 3
Lock Channel
5. Spanish
Setup
Setup Lock 6. No Info
Setup : Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set [0-6]: Select
: Select ENTER:Set

4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to

adjust. Then press ϵ or ϶ to adjust each
setting.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “MTS”, then press ϵ or
϶ to select “Stereo”.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Audio Language”,
then press ϶ or ENTER to display the Audio
Language menu.

Audio Audio
Audio
Bass 15 Bass 15
Treble 15 Bass 15 Treble 15
Balance 0 Treble 15 Balance 0
MTS Stereo Balance 0 MTS Stereo
Audio Language English MTS Stereo Audio Language English
Audio Language English

: Select : Adjust
: Select ENTER:Set
: Select : Adjust

Bass:
Treble:
Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the bass sound.
Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the treble
sound.
3 Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal
screen.

Balance: Press ϵ or ϶ to obtain an equal sound

level from both speakers.
Note:
• Generally you can leave your TV in stereo mode
3 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen. because the TV automatically outputs the type of
sound being broadcast (stereo or mono).
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select “Mono” to reduce
the noise.
To listen to a second audio program (SAP)
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “SAP” in step 2 above. The TV
speakers will output the second audio program instead
of normal audio.

38 39
TV operation

Using the aspect feature/ Setting the Auto Shut Off/

Adjusting the back lighting Resetting your settings
When the Aspect feature is set to On and the TV receives a 480i signal, the If the Auto Shut Off feature is On, a station being viewed stops broadcasting
picture size is automatically selected (as described in the following table). and the TV is not operated, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15
minutes.
ENTER ENTER
The Backlight feature adjusts the screen brightness for improved picture
clarity. / / / The Reset function returns your settings to the factory settings. / / /
EXIT/CANCEL EXIT/CANCEL
MENU MENU

Using the aspect feature Adjusting the back lighting Setting the Auto Shut Off Resetting your settings

1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.
1 Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu
screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select
“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Main Menu Main Menu

Main Menu Main Menu

TV operation
Picture Picture
Picture Picture
Audio Audio
Audio Audio
Channel Channel
Channel Channel
Lock Lock
Lock Lock
Setup Setup
Setup Setup
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set
: Select ENTER:Set : Select ENTER:Set

2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Aspect”.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Backlight”.
2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Shut Off”.
Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”. 2 Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Reset”.

Setup
Setup Setup Closed Caption >>
Setup
Closed Caption >> Language English
Closed Caption >>
Language English Closed Caption >> Video Label >>
Language English
Video Label >> Language English Backlight 16
Video Label >>
Backlight 16 Video Label >> Auto Shut Off Off
Backlight 16
Auto Shut Off Off Backlight 16 Aspect On
Aspect On Auto Shut Off Off
Auto Shut Off Off Reset >>
Reset >> Aspect On
Aspect On : Select ENTER:Set
Reset >>
: Select : Adjust Reset >>
: Select : Adjust
: Select : Adjust

3 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

3 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL 3 Press ϶ or ENTER to return your settings to
the factory settings.
to return to the normal screen.
3 Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.
to return to the normal screen.

Setup
Closed Caption >>
Language English
Video Label >>
Aspect ratio of signal Automatic aspect size
source
4:3 Normal
(When Aspect is On)
Natural
Backlight
Auto Shut Off
Aspect
Reset
8
Off
On
>>
4 “Reset” will appear on the screen approx. 3
seconds, then it returns to the normal

: Select : Adjust Note:

16:9 Full Full
• The Reset function returns your adjustments to the
4:3 Letter box Theater Wide2 following factory settings:
Not defined User-set mode 4 After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL
to return to the normal screen. Picture Setting
Brightness ...... center (25)
Bass................... center (15)
Treble ................ center (15)
Contrast ............ max (50) Balance................ center (0)
Sharpness...... center (25)
Color .............. center (25)
Tint ................... center (0)
Color Temperature ... Cool
Picture Preference .... Sports
Film Mode .......................On

40 41

Basic playback

TV/DVD EJECT
Playing a disc POWER POWER
PLAY
This section shows you the basics on how To obtain a higher quality picture
to play a disc. STOP VOLUME +/– Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a
POWER EJECT VOL +/– DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a
lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the Sharpness with the Picture
CAUTION ENTER Setting menu 35 .
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc slot when
disc is loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so / / / About DVD VCD CD

may cause serious personal injury. The DVD VCD CD icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the
PLAY function described under that heading. PLAY
STOP : You can use this function with DVD video discs. STOP
DVD VCD : You can use this function with Video CDs. PAUSE
VCD
CD
Basic playback CD : You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

Preparations: DVD
• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off. VCD
CD
Basic playback (continued)

1 Press POWER on the unit or on the remote con-

trol to turn on the unit.
• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes
4 On the TV screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and
then playback commences.
Reading
To pause playback (still mode)
Press PAUSE during playback.
To remove the disc
Press EJECT.
blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to To resume normal playback, Remove the disc after the disc comes
appear on screen. press PLAY. out.
• Every time you press POWER, the TV/DVD starts
from TV mode. • The sound is muted during still

Basic playback
• When using an amplifier, switch on the amplifier. mode.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the

disc has a menu feature.
To stop playback
Press / or / on the remote control to Press STOP.
select title, then press ENTER. Title is selected and
2
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD
mode. play commences.
The DVD startup screen will appear on the TV screen.

5
Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.
Note:
• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen
Volume : 25
according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again 7 60 .
• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few
minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
6 Press STOP to end playback.

QResuming facility
3 Load a disc in the disc slot.
• The unit records the stopped
point, depending on the disc.
“ ” appears on the screen.
Press PLAY to resume playback
(from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again
(“Q” appears on the TV screen.),
the unit will clear the stopped
point.
• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC 51 .
• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according
to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the
instructions supplied with the DVDs.
• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.
• Use the EJECT to unload and eject the disc.
• Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.
• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen
menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press
POWER on the remote control once the movie is completed.
• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

• Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side fac-
Q To start playback in the stop mode
ing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc
without touching either of its surfaces, align it with Press PLAY.
the guides, and place it in position.
• If a disc is inserted during some modes other than
DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then
playback may be begun automatically. Note:
If the unit does not operate properly:
Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD·s operation. In such
case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.

42 43
Basic playback Advanced playback

Playing a disc (Continued) Zooming/Locating desired scene

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make 0–9
PAUSE selections by switching the position of the frame.
JUMP
PLAY DISPLAY
Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the
SKIP / ZOOM
desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and
REV / FF track are used to locate the desired point to playback.
SLOW / To check the title/track, chapter/track and time, press DISPLAY. / / /
ENTER
EXIT/CANCEL
DVD DVD DVD
VCD
CD
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions VCD
CD
Zooming VCD
CD
Locating desired scene
To resume normal playback
Press REV or FF during playback.

REV: Fast reverse playback

Press PLAY.
1 Press ZOOM during playback.

The center part of the image will be

1 Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

Jump
FF: Fast forward playback zoomed in.
Title
Note: Each press of ZOOM will change
Chapter
Each time you press REV or FF • The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan the ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) Time
button, the playback speed changes. of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs. and 3 (x 2.0).
• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

DVD
VCD Playing frame by frame
1

2 Press or
ter” or “Time”.
to select the “Title/Track”, “Chap-

Jump
Title
To resume normal playback

Advanced playback
Press PAUSE during still playback. Chapter
Press PLAY. Time
Each time you press PAUSE, the
picture advances one frame.
Note:
• The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
2 Press
frame.
/ / / to view a different part of the

You may move the frame from

the center position to UP, DOWN, 3 Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

Jump
DVD LEFT or RIGHT direction.
VCD Playing in slow-motion Title
Chapter 12

Press SLOW (REVERSE) or (FORWARD) To resume normal playback Time

during playback. Press PLAY.

Each time you press the button, the

slow-motion speed changes.
Note:
3 In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to
return to a 1:1 view ( Off).
• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.
• Refer to the package supplied with
• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback. the disc to check the numbers.
• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.

DVD
VCD
CD
Locating a chapter or track Note:
• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the
4 Press ENTER. Playback starts.

• When you change the title,

playback starts from Chapter 1 of
Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want. zoom mode. the selected title.
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track. • Some discs may not respond to zoom feature. • Some discs may not work in the
above operation.
Playback starts from the beginning of
To locate succeeding chapters or tracks. the current chapter or track. Note:
When you press twice in quick successions, • In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time
playback starts from the beginning of can be selected.
the preceding chapter or track. • In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does
not work. To turn off PBC, see page 51 .
Note:
• A “Prohibition” symbol “” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not
available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the
TV/DVD.

44 45

Advanced playback

Marking desired scenes Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback PLAY MODE

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.
You can resume playback from each scene.
ENTER

ENTER
PLAY
/
SKIP /
EXIT/CANCEL
REPEAT A-B

MARKER
DVD
DVD
VCD Marking the scenes DVD
VCD Returning to the scenes DVD
VCD Repeat playback VCD
CD
A-B Repeat playback
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between

1 Press MARKER during playback.

1 Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop
mode.
two selected points.

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

1 The start point is selected.
A

2 Select the blank Marker using or .

Then press ENTER to mark the desired scene.
2 Press or to select the Marker 1-3.
2 [DVD]
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter”
or “Title”.
• Repeat this procedure to mark the The unit automatically starts
other 2 scenes. repeat playback after finishing
the current title or chapter.
Play Mode Advanced playback
Repeat : Off
2 Press REPEAT A-B again.

The end point is selected. Playback

starts at the point that you selected.
Playback stops at the end point and

3 Press MARKER to clear the display. 3 Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the marked

[Video CD]
Press to select “Repeat”.
Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or
returns to Point A automatically, then
starts again.
“All”.
scene. A B
The unit automatically starts
repeat playback after finishing
Note: Q To cancel the Marker the current track.
• Some discs may not work with the marking operation. Follow the above steps 1~2, then press EXIT/CANCEL.
• The marking is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the Play Mode
power off. Mode : Off

• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to Repeat : Off

appear.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.
To resume normal playback
• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, Press REPEAT A-B again.
press PLAY to start Repeat playback.
“ Off ” appears on the screen.

3 Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

Note:
• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations
may not be displayed.
• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include
To resume normal playback multiple angles.
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2. • A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback
is activated.
Note: • You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain
• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation. scenes of the DVD.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is • A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and
prohibited during playback.
MP3/WMA/JPEG CD.
• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP
or is pressed. • In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

46 47
Advanced playback

Program playback/Random playback Changing angles/Title selection/

You can arrange the playback order of tracks on the disc. And the 0–9
unit can also select tracks at random and playback them. These DVD menu DVD MENU
features work for Video CD. / / /
PLAY MODE ENTER
For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback
ENTER PLAY
(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 55 and “Program playback (Audio
CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 56 . / / / ANGLE
EXIT/CANCEL
PLAY TOP MENU

VCD
VCD Program playback Changing angles
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

1
Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Mode
Play Mode
: Off 1 –––
4 Press / to return to the left column, then
press / to select the “Program Playback”
and press ENTER.
1 Press ANGLE during playback.
The current angle will appear. 2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle
is selected.
Repeat : Off 2 –––
Program Playback 3 ––– The programs you selected will start to playback in order. 1/2

• To resume normal playback,

2 Press or to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.
select Mode: “Off” in step 2.
Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the
Play Mode angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
Play Mode
Mode : Program 1 9
Mode : Program 1 ––– Repeat : Off 2 3
Repeat : Off 2 –––
Program Playback 3 11
Program Playback 3 –––

Advanced playback
Title selection
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

3 Press / to select the programming position.

Press / and then use Number buttons (0–9)
to input the track.
Q To change the program
1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press / / /
to select the track number you want to change, then 1 Press TOP MENU during playback.
Title menu appears on the screen. 3 Press ENTER or PLAY.
The playback of the selected title will
press EXIT/CANCEL.
2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the new track start.
• To program others, repeat this step. number.
• If you input a wrong number, press
EXIT/CANCEL.
Q To clear the program one by one
Select Mode to “Program”, press / / / to select the
track number. Then press EXIT/CANCEL.
2 Press / / / to select the desired title.

Q To clear all the programs

Play Mode At the left column, press / to select “Clear Program”. Note:
Mode : Program 1 9 Then press ENTER. • Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.
Repeat : Off 2 ––– Note: • Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a
3 –––
Program Playback • In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
Program playback.
• The program is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the
power off. DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.
CD
VCD Random playback When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.

1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop

mode.
3 Press PLAY.

The Random Playback will start.

1 Press DVD MENU during playback.
The DVD menu appears on the TV
screen.
3 Press ENTER.
The menu continues to another
screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set
• Press DVD MENU again to resume the item completely.
• If you set “Random” during playback mode, playback at the scene when you
pressed DVD MENU.
2 Press / to select “Mode”, then press
ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.
Random playback will begin after the track that is
currently being played has ended. Note:

Mode
Play Mode
: Random
• To resume normal playback,
select Mode: “Off” in step 2. 2 Press / / / to select the desired item. • Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume
playback from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.
1 –––
Repeat : Off 2 ––– Note:
Program Playback 3 –––
• In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random
function during playback.
• The random playback is canceled when you eject the disc or
turn the power off.
48 49

Advanced playback

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles AUDIO SELECT

Disc status/To turn off the PBC
SUBTITLE
DISPLAY

PLAY MODE
/
ENTER

DVD
VCD Changing soundtrack language Subtitles
DVD
VCD Disc status VCD To turn off the PBC (see 7 )

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc. When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can With press of DISPLAY, the status of the disc Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.
select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off. will appear on the screen.
To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.
1
1 Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.
The current soundtrack language will 1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until
the desired language is selected.
Press / to select “Mode”, then press
appear.
1/2 Eng Dolby Digital
1/5 Eng
DVD
ELAPSED TOTAL
2 ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.
Play Mode
DISC OPERATION TIME TIME Mode : Off 1 –––
Repeat : Off 2 –––

2
3 –––
To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until Program Playback

2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the

desired language is selected.
“Off” appears.

Off
TITLE NO. DVD
Title 1/3
1/1 Eng Dolby Digital
1/1
00:15:25 01:41:39
Chapter 2/24
1/2 Eng
CHAPTER
NO. Advanced playback
2/2 Fre Dolby Digital Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

ANGLE NO. SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 3

• The on screen display will disappear after a
AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO
• The on screen display will disappear after a few few seconds.
seconds. Q To turn on the PBC
Note:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly
In case of Video CD playback subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off. until “PBC” appear.
• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when Video CD
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO you loaded or eject the disc. ELAPSED TOTAL
SELECT. • In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not DISC OPERATION TIME TIME
LR L R
be changed immediately.

VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03

Track 3/15

Note:
• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the
button several times, the language is not recorded on
the disc. TRACK NO.
• The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when
you eject the disc. The initial default language or
available language will be heard if the disc is played
back again.
• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no
sound will be heard from the TV/DVD·s speakers.

50 51
Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation

This unit can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/ / / /
WMA/JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied). ENTER
The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played. STOP
PLAY
This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable RETURN
discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner·s manual are meant only as a
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content. CD MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback
Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

CD Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information 1 Load an Audio CD or a disc on which MP3

or WMA files have been recorded in the disc
slot.
About file menu

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include 3-digits extension letters,
“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.
2 A file browser screen will appear on the screen.

Folder-1 Select Files

3/15 00:00:00
/WMA-11.WMA

MP3-5 Select Files

Folder-2 Repeat :Off MP3-6 Repeat :Off
• This unit can read 2000 files per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 files, it reads up to 2000 files, the remaining files MP3-1
MP3-2
Mode :Off
WMA-11 Mode :Off
will be omitted. MP3-3 WMA-12
WMA-1
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording. WMA-2
JPEG Preview Picture-1
• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG files, only audio tracks will be played. WMA-3 Picture-2
Music Playing
Picture-3
• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG files depending on its structure.
Picture-4
• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 15 letters) on
the screen. Long file names will be condensed.
• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
3 Press / to select file.
/MP3-2.MP3

Advanced playback
Folder-1 Select Files
Folder-2 Repeat :Off
MP3-1 Mode :Off
Limitations on display MP3-2
MP3-3
• The maximum number for display is 15 letters. WMA-1
JPEG Preview
Available letters for display are the following: WMA-2
WMA-3

capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score). Note:
• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen. • In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA
• In case the current directory includes more than 8 and JPEG files, the files are played back by selecting
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG files files, press or to scroll in the file list. them from the file browser.
To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order, • To see contents in folder, select the folder and then • MP3 or WMA file on the Kodak Picture CD is not
1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically. press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, press recognized on this unit.
2. Name each file including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”). RETURN or select “ Go Up ...” then press ENTER.
3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders. • When PLAY is pressed after the file browser
displayed, playback begins automatically starting Note:
CAUTION: from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an • During MP3/WMA playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions. MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played Repeat functions.
• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG files cannot be played back. back in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first • You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and
JPEG file is played back. If there is no file at a root Program playback for Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG playback
Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate: directory, playback does not begin automatically. 55 56 .
MP3 CD
MPEG-1 Audio
32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)
4 Press ENTER.
The selected file starts playing back.
QSelect Files
The file type to make it display in the file browser can
be chosen.
The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant 1.Press or to highlight “Select Files” at right column
bit rate. in the file browser.
WMA CD 2. Press ENTER, then press or to select file type
WMA version 7 and 8 from the list (Music or Picture).
Press STOP to end playback.
32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps
The file recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit. 5 3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked
file type will be displayed in the file browser.
4. Press RETURN to save the setting.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears
on the TV screen. Press PLAY to resume playback
(from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit
will clear the stopped point.

52 53

Advanced playback

ZOOM
MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD DVD MENU Repeat, random and program playback
ENTER
operation (Continued) / / / using file browser
PAUSE / / /
STOP ENTER
PLAY
PLAY
SKIP
ANGLE SKIP /
TOP MENU

CD JPEG playback CD Slide show playback CD Repeat playback (Audio CD/ CD Random playback (Audio CD/
MP3/WMA/JPEG) MP3/WMA/JPEG)
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after
1 Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.
another automatically.

A file browser screen

Preparation:
• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” 1 In the file browser, press / /
“Repeat” during stop mode.
/ to select
1 In the file browser, press /
“Mode” during stop mode.
/ / to select

2 will appear on the

screen.
/Picture-01.JPG

Picture-01
Picture-02
Picture-03
Select Files
Repeat
Mode
:Off
:Off
or “15 Seconds” 59 .

1 Select your desired starting file for the slide

Picture-04
Picture-05
Picture-06
Picture-07
JPEG Preview show in the step 3 on left. Folder-1 Select Files
Folder-1 Select Files
Folder-2 Repeat :Off
Folder-2 Repeat :Off
Picture-08 W: 2048 H: 1536
MP3-1 Mode :Off
MP3-1 Mode :Off

2 Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from MP3-2 MP3-2

3 Press / to select the file.

To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.
Press / / / to select the desired file.
the selected file. MP3-3 MP3-3

(To return to the file browser, press TOP MENU.)

2 Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or
“All”. 2 Press ENTER to select “Random”.
Advanced playback

• If you press PAUSE during the slide show, the slide

show stops temporary. “\\” appears briefly on the TV Folder-1 Select Files Folder-1 Select Files

Folder-2 Repeat :Track Folder-2 Repeat :Off

screen.
MP3-1 Mode :Off MP3-1 Mode :Random
Press PLAY or SKIP again to resume the slide show. MP3-2 MP3-2
• If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press MP3 3 MP3-3
• When PLAY is pressed after the file browser ANGLE repeatedly until it·s right side up.
displayed, playback begins automatically
starting from the first file. In this case, if the
first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the TV screen.
• When the slide show playback finished, the file list
3 Press PLAY.

The unit automatically starts repeat

3 Press PLAY.

The random playback will start.

played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA appears. playback after finishing the current
file, only MP3/WMA files are played back in • To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file browser track.
order. If there is no file at a root directory, appears.
playback does not begin automatically.
Note: To resume normal playback To resume normal playback

4 Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture

appears on the screen.
• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B
Repeat functions.
• When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Note:
Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Note:
image may not be displayed on a screen, preview window • The repeat function is canceled when you eject the disc • The random function is canceled when you eject the disc
or thumbnail list. or turn the power off. or turn the power off.
Rotating an image • It may have a longer interval due to the size of data. • Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP or
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees. is pressed.
Press ANGLE during playback of the image.
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.
Zooming an image
Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG
files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” 45 ).

5 Press STOP to end playback.

The file browser appears on the
screen. If you want to watch the
other file, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

54 55
Advanced playback Function setup

TV/DVD
Repeat, random and program playback Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize
using file browser (Continued) performance to your preference.
Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.
/ / / / / /
ENTER ENTER
PLAY SETUP
RETURN
DVD
CD Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG) VCD
CD
Setting procedure

1
Press / to select “Program View”, then press
In the file browser, press / / /
“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.
to select
4 ENTER. Program View shows only the
programmed files that you have added in step 2.
1 Press SETUP during stop mode.

The following on-screen display appears.

4
Then press or ENTER. The selectable
settings will appear.
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : 4:3
Off
English
4:3
QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On
MP3-1 Edit Mode Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu : English
Off 16:9
Output Mode : Auto
Audio
Picture Interlace
English
Folder-1 Repeat :Off MP3-2 Browser View QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: English
On
4:3
Folder-2 MP3-3 Clear Program
JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
Mode :Off Output
Display
Audio : English
Interlace
On
MP3-1 Edit Mode WMA-3
Pi t M
Di dX(R) VOD
A t
MP3-2
MP3 3

2
JPEG Preview Press or to select the desired section, then
When “Edit Mode” is black press or .
color, you can mark the files Program View Change the selection using or , by referring
which you want to add into
Program list.
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off

QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display

Output Mode
Audio
Picture
English
16:9

: English
On

: Auto
English
Interlace
5 to the corresponding pages 57 ~ 60 .
Press ENTER to save the setting.

2
JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
Press / / / to select file you want to Folder-1 Edit Mode
• Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to
add into the program list. Folder-2 Program View
MP3-1 Add To Program
change other option.
MP3-2 • To select another section, go
Folder-1 Repeat :Off MP3-3 back to step 2 by pressing

Function setup
Folder-2 Mode :Off WMA-1 First option will be highlighted. Press or repeatedly.
3
JPEG Preview
MP3-1 Edit Mode WMA-2
MP3-2
to select the desired option.
WMA-3
MP3-3
Browser View
Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off
English
16:9
WMA-1 To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP once or

6
JPEG Preview QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On
WMA 2
In the Program View, press PLAY. The files press RETURN repeatedly.

5
Output Mode
Audio
Picture : Auto
English
Interlace
Press ENTER. Selected file
start to playback in programed order that were JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off
was marked.
added by you.
Repeat this procedure to
select the other files.
To remove file from program list in stop mode
In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select file
3 Press / / / to select “Add To Program”.
Then press ENTER. All marked files are added
into the program list.
you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear
Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed
Setting details
from program list.
Section Option Details Page
Folder-1 Edit Mode
Note:
Folder-2 Program View
MP3-1 Add To Program
• The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc Menu Subtitle To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio”
MP3-2 or turn the power off. Audio if more than one language are available on the disc.
MP3-3
58
WMA-1
WMA 2
JPEG Preview TV Screen To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.
When you finish storing the files Display To turn On or Off the operational status display on the TV screen.
which you want into the Program
Picture Mode To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.
list, select “Edit Mode” and press
ENTER to release edit mode. JPEG Interval To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.
Night Mode To select On or Off for Night Mode. 59
To select a digital output sound format corresponding to your
Digital Out
system connection.
Parental To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.
60
Password To change the password.

56 57

Function setup

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Setting details

Picture Mode
Parental
DRC
E.B.L.
Menu : Off
English Parental
DRC
Menu
TV Screen : Off
16:9
English Parental
Menu
E.B.L.
Night Mode : Off
English

QSound
TV
Subtitle
Screen
Set Password
: 4:3
English
On QSoundSet Password
Subtitle
Display : English
On Subtitle
TV
Digital
Screen
Out
Set Password
: English
4:3
Bitstream
There are two types of source content in pictures
Output
Display
Audio : On
Interlace
English Output Mode
Audio
Picture : Auto
Interlace
English recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures Output
Audio
Display : Interlace
On
English

Picture Mode
DivX(R) :VOD
Auto JPEG Interval
DivX(R) :VOD
Off recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and Picture Mode
DivX(R) VOD
: Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On second). Make this selection according to the type of Screen Saver : On
content being viewed.

Auto: Select this selection normally.

Menu, Subtitle, Audio TV Screen The DVD player automatically detects Ϯ Night Mode
source content, film or video of Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and You have the following screen sizes to choose from: playback source, and converts that to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto signal in an appropriate method.
Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc.
the disc. 4:3 (Letter box):
When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it Film: The DVD player converts film content On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down
English, Francais, Espanol: displays the wide picture with black bands at the pictures appropriately. Suitable for slightly when played back. This is suitable when
The selected language will be heard or seen. top and bottom of screen. playback of film content pictures. it is connected to a stereo.
Note:
Function setup

Other: • This function works only when the disc recorded with
Other language can be selected (see “Language 4:3 (Pan & scan): Video: The DVD player filters video signal and Dolby Digital is played back.
code list” 65 ). It displays the wide picture on the whole screen converts it appropriately. • The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD
with left and right edges automatically cut off. Suitable for playback of video content video disc.
Original (Audio): pictures.
The unit will select the first priority language of
16:9 (Wide):
each disc. Note:
A wide screen picture is displayed full size.
Off (Subtitle): • Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or
Ϯ Digital Out
Subtitles do not appear. Note: doubled. In this case, select “Video”.
• If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it You can select the digital output sound format corresponding
will display 4:3 style. JPEG Interval to your system connection.
Note: Off:
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the You can continuously playback all JPEG files There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
first-priority language is selected. jack.
automatically.
• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform After the selection below, the disc will start playback on
Display PCM:
it by “Language” in the TV menu 21 . Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.
JPEG files which have been recorded.
Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo
On screen display can be switched on or off when you amplifier.
press any buttons. Off:
Plays back one file at a time. Bitstream:
Disc audio bitstream data will be output.
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you
press any buttons. 5 Seconds:
Note:
On: On screen displays appear when you press Plays back images in the form of a slide show at • Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output
the buttons (factory setting). 5 second intervals. in PCM format.

10 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
15 second intervals.

58 59
Function setup

EJECT
Customizing the function settings (Continued) Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc 0–9
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level
that you have set.
It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
ENTER

RETURN

Setting details (continued) DVD Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc
Note:
DRC
Menu
E.B.L.
Parental

QSound
Subtitle
TV
Password
Screen
: Off
English

: Change
English
4:3
On
QSet the new password

1) Press or to select “Password”, then press

1 Load a DVD disc.
• This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until
the disc is ejected.
When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be
Audio
Display : On
English ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will set again automatically.
Picture Mode : Auto appear.
JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds 2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current
Screen Saver : On
password (If the password has not been set yet
after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).
3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen
will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input
the new password.
Parental control setting 4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been
set. Be sure to remember this number!
Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such
discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.
1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press
If you forget the password 2 If the DVD disc has been designed to
temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen
which follows the “Reading” screen will
ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear. 1) Press EJECT to remove the disc. change, depending on which disc is played.
2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). 2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and If you select “YES” with the ENTER key,
(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this then press STOP on the unit. “Password Clear” password input screen will then appear.
unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list appears on the screen. Now the password • If “NO” is selected, press EJECT to remove

Function setup
will appear. has been returned to the initial value (“0000”). the disc.
• Level Off: The parental control setting does not
function.
• Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be
played back.
• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be
Note:
• If each setup (pages 58 ~ 60 ) has completed, the unit
can always work under the same condition (especially with
3 Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).
Then press ENTER.

DVD discs).
played back. To exit from the entry, press
Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn
3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8. the power off. RETURN.
The limitation will be more severe as the level
number is lower. Then press ENTER.
Enter Password

Note:
• The parental control level is equivalent to the following
USA movie ratings.

Level 1: G Level 5:
Level 2: Level 6: R
Level 3: PG Level 7: NC-17
Level 4: PG-13 Level 8:

The parental control levels for other countries/area

than U.S. are included for future use. Check the
appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD
video disc equipped with the parental control feature
in the future.
4 Playback will commence if the entered
password is correct.

• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating
level information though its disc jacket says “adult.”
For those discs, the age restriction will not work.
• The password is required every time when you
change the parental level.
• If you input a wrong number, press EXIT/CANCEL.

60 61

Others

Understanding the Power Return feature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV/DVD and the power is resupplied, the Power Return feature will
turn the TV/DVD on automatically. If the power is going to be off for a long time or you are going to be away from the
TV/DVD for a long time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent the TV/DVD from turning on in your
absence.

Troubleshooting SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or
service outlet if problems persist.
Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.
SYMPTOMS
POWER
TV/DVD does not operate.
TV BROADCAST RECEPTION
Poor sound or No sound.
Poor picture or No picture.
Poor reception on some
channels.
Poor color or no color.
DVD
• No disc is loaded. 42
Playback doesn·t start. • The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc. 7
• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. 8
POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE
No picture. • TV/DVD selector is not set correctly. 42
• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly. -
• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured. No sound. • The unit is in the special playback mode. 44
• Try another AC outlet. 19 • Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV amplifier. 18, 19
• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.
Picture is distorted during fast
• The picture will be distorted occasionally. -
reverse/forward playback.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 25 Stopping playback, search,
• Check Volume adjustments or mute. 25, 26 slowmotion play, repeat play, or
• Check for sources of possible interference. 64 • Some discs may not do some of the functions. -
program play, etc. cannot be
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 25 performed.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 No on-screen display. • Set Display to On. 58
• Check for sources of possible interference. 64
The unit or remote operation key • Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes,
• Check Picture setting. 35 -
is not functioning. then replug it.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 25
Playback does not start when
• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station. 14 • Check the Parental setup. 60
the title is selected.
• Check for sources of possible interference. 64
Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 25
language is not changed when • Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc. 50
• Make sure channels are set into memory. 22
you playback a DVD.
• Check Picture setting. 35
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 • Some discs have no subtitles.
Others

Picture wobbles or drifts.
No CATV reception.
Horizontal or diagonal bars on
screen.
No reception above channel 13.
TV shuts off.
Closed - Caption is not
activated.
Display is not shown in your
language.
No subtitle. 50
• Check for sources of possible interference. 64 • Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.
• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station. 25 Angle cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc. 49
• Make sure channels are set into memory. 22 “” appears on the screen. • The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 44
• Cable TV company is scrambling signal. -
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 REMOTE CONTROL
• Check all Cable TV connections. 15 • Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.
• Set Air/Cable selection to the Cable position. 22 • Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.
The remote control does not
• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station. 25 • Clear the path of the beam. 13
function.
• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.
• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna. 14, 15 • Check the batteries are inserted correctly.
• Check for sources of possible interference. 64
• Make sure Air/Cable selection is in the appropriate position. 22
• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections. 14
• Auto shut off feature worked. 41
• Sleep Timer is set. 26
• Power interrupted. -
• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed 25
captioned. Try another channel.
• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or 14, 15
rotate antenna.
• Set “CC Setting” to “On” to turn on the closed caption decoder. 33
• Select proper language in the menu options. 21

62 63
Others

Reception disturbances Language code list

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna. Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 58 .
Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown
below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may
be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast. Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code
Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919
Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921
Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922

IGNITION Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may flutter or Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529
drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems, Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931
neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair
dryers. Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933
Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932
Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022
Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017
Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011
GHOSTS Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030
Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015
the direct path and the other is reflected by tall buildings, hills or other
Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018
large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may
improve the reception. Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225
Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019
Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025
Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028
Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021
SNOW Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033
If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception
area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture. Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121
If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Rhaeto-Romance 2823 Urdu 3128

Others
antenna may be necessary. Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136
Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219
Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225
Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335
Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI) English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418
Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving
ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019
loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525
the antenna or installing an RFI filter may improve the picture.
Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

To prevent fire or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning.
Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

64 65

Others

Specifications
Limited United States Warranty
Model 15LV505 LCD TV/DVD Combination - Depot Repair Warranty
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original
General consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
Power supply AC 120V 60Hz PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE
Power consumption Operation: 35 W, Stand by: 0.8 W ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
Weight 7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)
LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE
Width: 15-13/16 inches (402 mm)
Dimensions Height: 12-5/8 inches (320 mm) OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED
Depth: 5-1/2 inches (140.1 mm) BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Operating temperature 5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)
Operating humidity Less than 80% RH (No condensation)
LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED
Television
BY THESE WARRANTIES.
LCD panel (Screen size is approximate.) 15-inch diagonal
Display method Color TFT LCD
Number of pixels 1366 (Horizontal) x 768 (Vertical) Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor Your Responsibility
Television system NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM TACP warrants this LCD TV/DVD Combination THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO
VHF: 2-13
and its parts against defects in materials or THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
Receiving channels UHF: 14-69 workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84) the date of original retail purchase. DURING (1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide
Antenna input VHF/UHF 75 ohm THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP·S OPTION, other proof of purchase.
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH
Speaker 1-3/16 x 2-13/16 inches (30.5 x 71.1 mm), 8 ohm x 2
A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT (2) All warranty servicing of this LCD TV/DVD
Audio output power 1.5W + 1.5W CHARGE TO YOU. Combination must be made by the Depot
DVD/CD player Warranty Repair Center specified by the TACP
Signal system NTSC Rental Units Consumer Solutions Center.
The warranty for LCD TV/DVD Combination rental
1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)
Applicable disc
2. CD (12cm, 8cm) units begins on the date of the first rental or thirty (3) The warranties from TACP are effective only
(30) days after the date of shipment to the rental if the LCD TV/DVD Combination is purchased
Pickup 1-Lens, 2-Beams System
firm, whichever comes first. and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or
Others

Input/Output Puerto Rico.

(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1 Commercial Units
S-Video input
(C) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm LCD TV/DVD Combinations sold and used for (4) Labor service charges for set installation,
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1 commercial purposes have a limited warranty for all setup, adjustment of customer controls, and
ColorStream video input
(PB, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 2 parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date installation or repair of antenna systems are not
Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1 of original retail purchase and ends on the date that covered by this warranty. Reception problems
is ninety (90) days thereafter. caused by inadequate antenna systems are
Audio input –8dBm, 50 kohm, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2
your responsibility.
Digital audio output (Coaxial) 0.5 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 1 Owner·s Manual and Product Registration Card
Headphone ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1 Read this owner·s manual thoroughly before operating (5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials
Accessories this LCD TV/DVD Combination. or workmanship as limited above, and do not
extend to any LCD TV/DVD Combination or
Remote control (SE-R0305) ................................................................................................... 1
Batteries (R03/AAA) .............................................................................................................. 2 Complete and mail the enclosed product registration parts that have been lost or discarded by you
AC cord .................................................................................................................................. 1 card or register your LCD TV/DVD Combination or to damage to the LCD TV/DVD Combination
Owner·s manual (this booklet) ..................................................... .......................................... 1 online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident,
Quick setup guide (Spanish) .................................................................................................. 1 possible. By registering your LCD TV/DVD Acts of God (such as lightning or fluctuations in
• This model complies with the above specifications. Combination you will enable TACP to bring you electric power), improper installation, improper
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice. new products specifically designed to meet your maintenance, or use in violation of instructions
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future. needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely furnished by TACP; use or malfunction
event a safety notification is required under the through simultaneous use of this LCD TV/DVD
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to Combination and connected equipment; or to
complete and return the product registration card units that have been modified or had the serial
does not diminish your warranty rights. number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered
illegible.

66 67
CAUTION
THIS LCD COLOR TELEVISION EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-
FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,
CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.
VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA

RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,
21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING
The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.
Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the
time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.
Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode
at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.
• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.
• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

A1-1
 SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING
1. KEEP THE NOTICES
As for the places which need special attentions,
they are indicated with the labels or seals on the
cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the
indications and notices in the operation manual.
2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK
There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an
electric shock while the electric current is
flowing.
3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS
The parts in this equipment have the specific
characters of incombustibility and withstand
voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is
replaced should be used the part which has
the same character.
Especially as to the important parts for safety
which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the
table of parts as a mark, the designated
parts must be used.
4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE
LCD PANEL
Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing.
Take enough care to deal with it.
5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE
ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER
ASSEMBLING OR WIRING
There are parts which use the insulation
material such as a tube or tape for safety, or
which are assembled in the condition that
these do not contact with the printed board.
The inside wiring is designed not to get closer
to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts.
Therefore, put these parts in the original
positions.
6. PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER
SERVICING
Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which
were removed in order to service are put in the
original positions, or whether there are the
portions which are deteriorated around the
serviced places serviced or not. Check the
insulation between the antenna terminal or
external metal and the AC cord plug blades.
And be sure the safety of that.
(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)
1. Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.
2. Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn
on the TV.
3. Insulation resistance between the cord plug
terminals and the eternal exposure metal
[Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by
using the 500V insulation resistance meter
[Note 1].
4. If the insulation resistance is less than 1M
ohm, the inspection repair should be
required.
[Note 1]
If you have not the 500V insulation
resistance meter, use a Tester.
[Note 2]
External exposure metal: Antenna terminal
Headphone jack

HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)
1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER
The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be
found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.
2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION
You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

A1-2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manu- PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)
facturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or S3126A
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.

15) Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such a vases,
shall be placed on the apparatus.

16) An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as
contact with them might be fatal.

17) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

18) Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short
out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

A1-3
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

19) If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is
grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA LEAD
IN WIRE

GROUND
CLAMP

ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)

ELECTRIC SERVICE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

EQUIPMENT (NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ELECTRODE SYSTEM
S2898A (NEC ART 250, PART H)

20) When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by
the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

21) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to
determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

22) Keep your fingers clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause injury.

23) When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from
the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's
manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

24) Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume
sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

A1-4
 IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

25) Do not allow the product to output distorted sound for an extended period of time. It may cause speaker
overheating and fire.

26) When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continu-
ously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

27) Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the
laser beam. It may cause eye damage.

28) Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious
personal injury and product malfunction.

29) This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be con-
nected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

CONDENSATION
Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a
warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly. When this happens, player's performance will
be impaired.
To prevent this, let the player stand in its new surroundings for about an hour before switching it on, or
make sure that the room temperature rises gradually.
Condensation may also form during the summer if the player is exposed to the breeze from an air condi-
tioner. In such cases, change the location of the player.

HOW TO HANDLE THE LCD PANEL

• Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur.
• If the LCD panel is broken, make absolutely sure that you do not touch the liquid in the panel. This may
cause skin inflammation.
If the liquid gets in your mouth, immediately gargle and consult with your doctor. Also, if the liquid gets in
your eyes or touches your skin, consult with your doctor after rinsing for at least 15 minutes or longer in clean
water.

A1-5
 WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig.
1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD
MT PCB connector.

NOTE
• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the
Flux smoke away from it.

Pick Up PCB

Short circuit using a

soldering iron.

Fig. 1

A1-6
 DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
2. Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)
3. Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.

DVD Deck

Belt Loading

Fig. 1

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
1. Turn Unit ON.
2. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
3. Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.
4. Press and hold the “STOP” button on the top panel.
5. Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.
6. Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.
7. The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.
8. The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

A1-7
 REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE

NEC Format
Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H
No. Key Name Custom Code Key Code
1 EJECT 45 BA F5
2 TV/DVD 45 BC B3
1 4
2 3 SLEEP 40 BF 15
3
5 4 POWER 40 BF 12
7
6 5 1 40 BF 01
8 10 6 2 40 BF 02
9
13 7 3 40 BF 03
11
12 8 4 40 BF 04
14 16 9 5 40 BF 05
15 19 10 6 40 BF 06
18
20 11 7 40 BF 07
17
12 8 40 BF 08
21 24 13 9 40 BF 09
22 23 14 DISPLAY 40 BF 1C
26 15 0 40 BF 00
25
27 16 / JUMP 44 BB 9B
29 17 SUBTITLE 44 BB 87
28 30 18 CH UP 40 BF 1B
31 19 VOLUME + 40 BF 1A
20 AUDIO SELECT 44 BB 53
32 33
21 INPUT/ZOOM 40 BF 0F
34 36 22 CH DOWN 40 BF 1F
35 23 VOLUME - 40 BF 1E
37 40 24 MUTE 40 BF 10
38 39 25 PLAY MODE 40 BF 1D
41 44
42 43 26 DVD MENU 40 BF 19
27 UP 44 BB 80
45 47 28 LEFT 44 BB 51
46
49 29 ENTER 44 BB 4E
48
30 RIGHT 44 BB 4D
31 DOWN 44 BB 81
32 MENU/SETUP 40 BF 0E
33 EXIT/CANCEL 44 BB EF
34 PAUSE 44 BB 10
35 PLAY 44 BB 15
36 STOP 44 BB 14
37 CH RTN/|<<SKIP 40 BF 17
38 <<REV 44 BB 19
39 FF>> 44 BB 13
40 CLOSED CAPTION/SKIP>>| 40 BF 57
41 <|SLOW 45 BA 0E
42 ANGLE 44 BB 96
43 MARKER 45 BA EC
44 SLOW |> 44 BB 0D
45 TOP MENU 44 BB DF
46 RETURN 44 BB 5D
47 REPEAT A-B 44 BB 5C
48 GAME 40 BF 28
49 PICTURE SIZE 40 BF 59

A1-8
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 15.6 inch / 394.9mmV
System LCD Type Color TFT LCD
Number of Pixels 1366(H) x 768(V)
View Range Left/Right 85/85 degree
Up/Down 80/80 degree
<
Bright Dot n=0
Zero Bright Dot Ratio ---
Color System NTSC
Speaker 2 Speaker
Position Front
Size 1.2 x 2.8 inch
Impedance 8 ohm
Sound Output Max 1.5W + 1.5W
10%(Typical) ---
G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC
Disc DVD, CD-
DVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)
Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm
Drive DSM-2
Search speed Fwd 4 step
Actual 2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Rev 4 step
Actual 2-45 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times
Actual --
Rev 1/7 -1/2 times
Actual --
G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog US System M
System Digital ATSC(8VSB)/QAM
Tuner and System 1Tuner
Receive CH Destination US (W/CABLE)
CH Coverage 2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84
Intermediate Digital 44.00MHz
Frequency Analog Picture(FP) 45.75MHz
Sound(FS) 41.25MHz
FP-FS 4.50MHz
Preset CH No
Stereo/Dual TV Sound US-Stereo
Tuner Sound Muting Yes
G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm
Output Level --
S/N Ratio (Weighted) --
Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode --
--
RGB Signal Output Level --
Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm
Output Level at DVD --
at TV --
--
Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm
S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) --
Harmonic Distortion --
Frequency Response : at DVD --
at Video CD --
at SVCD --
at CD --

A2-1
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-5 Power Power Source AC 120V, 60Hz
DC --
Power Consumption at AC 35W at 120V 60Hz
at DC --
Stand by (at AC) 0.8W at 120V 60Hz
Energy Star Yes
Per Year -- kWh/Year
Protector Power Fuse Yes
Safety Circuit Yes
IC Protector(Micro Fuse) Yes
G-6 Regulation Safety UL(UL6500_2nd)
Radiation FCC
Laser DHHS
G-7 Temperature Operation +5oC ~ +40oC
Storage -20oC ~ +60oC
Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)
G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH
G-9 Clock and Clock (Only Broadcasting data) No
Timer Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min
On Timer Program No
Off Timer Program No
Game Timer No
Wake Up Timer No
Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec

A2-2
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-10 Remote Unit RC-LT
Control Glow in Dark Remocon Yes
Remocon Format TOSHIBA
Format TOSHIBA
Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h
Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
Total Keys 49 Keys
Keys Power Yes
Eject Yes
Sleep Yes
TV/DVD Yes
1 Yes
2 Yes
3 Yes
4 Yes
5 Yes
6 Yes
7 Yes
8 Yes
9 Yes
0 Yes
Jump / - Yes
Display Yes
Subtitle Yes
Audio Select Yes
Input Select / Zoom Yes
Mute Yes
CH Up Yes
CH Down Yes
Vol Up Yes
Vol Down Yes
Play Mode Yes
DVD Menu Yes
Up Yes
Down Yes
Left Yes
Right Yes
Enter Yes
Menu / Setup Yes
Exit / Cancel Yes
Game Yes
Picture Size Yes
Pause Yes
Play Yes
Stop Yes
Skip+ / Closed Caption Yes
Skip- / CH Return Yes
Search+ Yes
Search- Yes
Slow+ Yes
Slow- Yes
Angle Yes
Marker Yes
Top Menu Yes
Return Yes
Closed Caption No
Repeat A-B Yes
Zoom/ Quick View No
Freeze frame No

A2-3
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-11 Features Auto Shut Off Yes
Auto Search No
Power On Memory Yes
Comb Filter Yes
3 -D
Game Position Yes
Auto Setup(Language/CH Program) Yes
Picture Setting(TV) Yes
Picture Preference Yes
Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes
Tint Yes
Sharpness Yes
Color Temperature Yes
DNR Yes
Cable Clear No
Picture Setting(PC) No
HOR Position , VER Position No
Phase, Clock No
Red, Green, Blue No
Auto Adjust No
Backlight No
Audio MTS Yes
Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes
Stable Sound No
Surround No
BBE No
SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No
Variable Audio Out No
Tuning CH Program Yes
Air/Cable Yes
ADD/DELETE Yes
Label CH Label Yes
Video Label Yes
Favorite CH No
V-Chip Yes
Type USA Type
RRT Setup Yes
Lock Hotel Lock No
Channel Lock No
Video Lock No
Panel Lock No
English
Menu Language French
Spanish
Closed Caption Yes
CC Advanced Yes
Picture Size Yes
HD Zoom Yes
Picture Scroll No
Film Mode Yes
Aspect Yes
Backlight Yes
PFC(Power Factor circuit) No
Freeze frame No
PIP/POP No
Direct Input Selection Yes
Digital Out Dolby Digital Yes
MPEG No
PCM No
DTS No

A2-4
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
PC Monitor Input No
VGA (640x480) No
VGA (720x400) No
WVGA (848x480) No
SVGA (800x600) No
XGA (1024x768) No
WXGA (1280x768) No
WXGA (1280x720) No
WXGA (1360x768) No
SXGA (1280x1024) No
HDMI Input No
VGA (640×480) No
720×480i (4:3) No
720×480i (16:9) No
720×480p (4:3) No
720×480p (16:9) No
720×576i (4:3) No
720×576i (16:9) No
720×576p (4:3) No
720×576p (16:9) No
1280×720p No
1920×1080i No
CEC (ORION Standard) No
Deep Color No
xvYCC No
Component Input Yes
720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz)
720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)
720×576i (4:3) No
720×576i (16:9) No
720×576p (4:3) No
720×576p (16:9) No
1280×720p Yes (60Hz)
1920×1080i Yes (60Hz)
Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) No
Screw Size No
Features Video CD Playback Yes
(DVD) SVCD Playback No
MP3 Playback Yes
JPEG Yes
WMA Yes
Divx Playback No
DMF Support No
Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(MPEG) Yes
(PCM) Yes
(DTS) Yes
Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes
(DTS) No
Closed Caption Yes
Screen Saver No
TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box, Pan Scan) Yes
16:9 (Wide) Yes
Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit

A2-5
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-12 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English
w/Guarantee Card Yes
Remote Control Unit Yes
Rod Antenna No
Poles --
Terminal --
Loop Antenna No
Terminal --
U/V Mixer No
DC Car Cord (Center+) No
Guarantee Card No
Warning Sheet No
Circuit Diagram No
Antenna Change Plug No
Service Facility List No
Important Safeguard No
Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No
Quick Set-up Sheet(Spanish) Yes
Battery Yes
UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs
OEM Brand No
AC Adapter No
AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No
AC Cord Yes
AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No
Registration Card (NDL Card) Yes
300 to 75ohm Antenna Adapter No
Sheet Information (Return) Yes(USA version)
Sheet Information (HDMI) No
Cleaning Cloth No

A2-6
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-13 Interface Switch Top Power (Tact) Yes
Channel Up/Menu Up/Play Yes
Channel Down/Menu Down/Stop Yes
Volume Up/Menu > Yes
Volume Down/Menu < Yes
Menu Yes
Play No (CH+ Alternative)
Eject Yes
Skip+, Search+ No
Skip-, Search- No
Still/Pause No
Stop No (CH- Alternative)
Main Power SW No
Input Select/Enter Yes
Rear Main Power SW No
Indicator Power/Stand-By Yes (Blue / Red)
Power Wake Up No
On Timer No
Terminals Rear Video Input 1 RCA x 1
Audio Input 1 RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
S - Input 1 Yes
Video Input 2 No
Audio Input 2 No
S - Input 2 No
Video Output No
Audio Output No
Component Input 1 RCA x 3
Analog Audio RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)
Component Input 2 No
Analog Audio No
HDMI Input 1 No
Analog Audio No
HDMI Input 2 No
Analog Audio No
Sub Woofer Out No
PC Monitor Input No
Analog Audio No
Digital Audio Output Coaxial
DC Jack (Center +) No
VHF/UHF Antenna Input F Type
Video Input 3 No
Audio Input 3 No
S - Input 3 No
Other Terminal Headphone
AC Inlet Yes
G-14 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 402.0 x 140.1 x 320.0
w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm) 402.0 x 64.0 x 289.0
G-15 Weight Net (Approx.) 3.5kg (7.7 lbs)
Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.) 3.3kg (7.3 lbs)
Gross (Approx.) 5.0kg (11.0 lbs)

A2-7
 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-16 Carton Master Carton No
Content --- Sets
Material --- / ---
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---
Description of Origin ---
Gift Box Material Double/Full Color
W/Color Photo Label No
W/Handle Yes
Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 474 x404 x 210
Description of Origin Yes
Drop Test Natural Dropping At 2 Corner / 2 Edges / 3 Surfaces
Height (cm) 80
Container Stuffing (40' container) 1551 Sets/40' container
w/Pallet No
w/Wrapping No
G-17 Material Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN
Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM
Jack Panel --
PCB Non-Halogen Demand No
Eyelet Demand Yes
G-18 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of ORION
Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)
Measures for Whisker Yes

A2-8
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS 1-3: POWER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)
AND P.C. BOARDS 1. Remove the 2 screws (1).
2. Remove the Sheet Pc-1 in the direction of arrow (A).
3. Remove the Angle Lcd-R in the direction of arrow (B).
CAUTION
4. Disconnect the following connectors:
Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because
(CP501, CP2201 and CP8101).
the FFC cable may be damaged.
5. Remove the 5 screws (2).
6. Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)
1. Remove the 2 screws (1). (1) (1)
2. Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).
Sheet Pc-1
3. Unlock the support (2).
(A)
4. Remove the Cover Back in the direction of arrow (B).
Angle Lcd-R
5. Remove the 6 screws (3).
(2) (B)
Stand Ass'y
(2)
(2) (2)
(2) CP8101
Power PCB
(3) (1)
(1)
CP501
(C)
(3) (2)
(3) (A)
(3)
Support
(3)
(B) Cover Back CP2201

Fig. 1-3

1-4: DIGITAL PCB AND OPERATION PCB

(3)
(Refer to Fig. 1-4)
Fig. 1-1
1. Remove the 2 screws (1).
2. Remove the Sheet Pc-2 in the direction of arrow (A).
1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND 3. Remove the Angle Lcd-L in the direction of arrow (B).
REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2) 4. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP3001 and CP3002).
1. Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of 5. Remove the 4 screws (2).
arrow (A). 6. Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
2. Disconnect the following connectors: 7. Remove the Shield Digital in the direction of arrow (D).
(CD7005 and CP2804). 8. Remove the 2 screws (3).
3. Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B). 9. Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (E).
4. Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).
5. Unlock the support (1). (1)
6. Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C). (1)
Sheet Pc-2

(A)
CP3001 (2)
(2)
CP3002 Angle Lcd-L
(B)
Front Cabinet Ass'y
(2)
LCD Panel Operation PCB (3) (2)
(A) (3)
Digital PCB
(C) (D)
(E)

Remocon PCB Shield Digital

(B)
CD7005
CP7601
(C)
Support
(1)
Fig. 1-4
CP2804
Fig. 1-2

B1-1
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-5: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
1. Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a
soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no
soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
2. Remove the 3 screws (1).
3. Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).
4. Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).
5. Remove the support (2).
6. Remove the Cover DVD in the direction of arrow (B).
7. Remove the 2 screws (3).
8. Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (C).
9. Remove the 4 screws (4).
10.Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (D).

(2)
Support Cover DVD

Angle Mpeg (B) (1)

(1)
(D)
CP2303
CP2302
CP2301
(C)
DVD MT PCB
Pick Up PCB (4)
(4) (4)
(1)
DVD Deck

(3)
Short circuit using a
soldering iron.
(A) (3)

Fig. 1-5

NOTE
1. Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF
SERVICING"
2. Use the Lead Free solder.
3. Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing
equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke
away from it.
5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering
on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up
PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

B1-2
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

Check Hook
NOTE Check Hook Check Hook

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed

here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly
is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace
the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A) Loader Ass'y (Top Side)
1. Remove the 3 screws (1). Fig. 2-1-D
2. Unlock the 2 supports (2).
3. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y. 2-2: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK
4. Remove the Traverse Ass'y. FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)
1. Remove the Insulator (F).
2. Remove the Insulator (R).
3. Unlock the support (1).
(2)
4. Remove the Gear Middle.
(2) 5. Remove the screw (2).
Loader Sub Ass'y
6. Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.
7. Remove the screw (3).
8. Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
Insulator (R) 9. Remove the screw (4).
10. Remove the Gear Feed.
Traverse Ass'y 11. Remove the 2 screws (5).
12. Remove the Feed Motor.
13. Remove the Gear Motor.
(1)
(1)
(1)
• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm
Fig. 2-1-A Feed Motor

Gear Motor
NOTE Traverse Ass'y Insulator (R)

1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire

on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C. Insulator (F)

Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)

(1) (5)
(5)
Gear Feed

Insulator (F) (4)

Check Lock Check Lock Rack Feed Ass'y Gear Middle

(2)
Check Hook
Fig. 2-1-B Switch PCB Ass'y

(3)
80 ± 5mm • Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)
• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)
• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)
Fig. 2-2-A

Loader Ass'y
Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-C

B2-1
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
Traverse Ass'y
1. When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to Check Hook
align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.
2. In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value
Check Hook
of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.
Check Hook
3. When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it
correctly as Fig. 2-2-D.
Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC Check Hook

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds • Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu Fig. 2-2-E
4. After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire
on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E. 2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING

Rack Feed Ass'y 1. When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as
shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.
NOTE
Push Push
1. Do not make the folding lines except the specified
positions for the FFC.
[OK] [NG]
[ 24 pin FFC ]
Fold it by 90û

To Pick Up PCB Printing Surface

Fig. 2-2-B
20 ± 1mm

30 ± 1mm

Gear Motor
8.0 ± 0.2mm
Fig. 2-3-A
Feed Motor

[ 6 pin FFC ]
40 ± 1mm

Safety surface for pressing

of the insert. Fold
Fig. 2-2-C
Printing Surface

Switch PCB Ass'y

~ FEED MOTOR ~
WHITE (4)

BROWN (3)

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fig. 2-3-B

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
YELLOW (2)

GREEN (1)

Fig. 2-2-D

B2-2
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF 3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after
desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using
FLAT PACKAGE IC tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC
desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)
REMOVAL
NOTE
1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be
IC to protect other parts from any damage. careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC
(Refer to Fig. 3-1.) leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.
NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within Blower type IC
10 mm distance from IC leads. desoldering
machine

Masking Tape IC
(Cotton Tape)

Tweezers

Fig. 3-1
IC
Fig. 3-3
2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering
machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)
4. Peel off the Masking Tape.
NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC 5. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
can move back and forth easily after desoldering the Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)
leads completely. NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical
direction towards the IC pattern.
Blower type IC
desoldering machine

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

IC
IC pattern Fig. 3-4
Fig. 3-2

B3-1
 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION 4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the
soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thin-
1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the tip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)
new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder
each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)
Thin-tip Soldering Iron IC

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-8

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

Solder temporarily
2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads
sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)
Solder temporarily
IC using a magnifying glass.
Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering
Fig. 3-5 position and installation position of the parts around the
IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.
NOTE
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or
repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the
bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be
damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this
case.

Solder Soldering Iron

IC Supply soldering
from upper position
to lower position

Fig. 3-6

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron
IC

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 3-7

B3-2
 SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote
control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

Set Remocon Standard

Set Key Operations
Condition Key Time
VOL. DOWN
TV mode 0 2 sec. Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.
(Minimum)
Initialization of factory TV data.
VOL. DOWN
TV mode 1 2 sec. NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such
(Minimum)
as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

DVD mode VOL. DOWN Initialization of factory DVD data.

4 2 sec.
(No disc) (Minimum)

DVD mode VOL. DOWN DVD Write mode.

5 2 sec.
(No disc) (Minimum) Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

VOL. DOWN POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.

ALL mode 6 2 sec. Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.
(Minimum)
Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

VOL. DOWN Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.
ALL mode 8 2 sec.
(Minimum) Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.

VOL. DOWN
ALL mode 9 2 sec. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display
(Minimum)
Adjustment).

DVD mode DCheck of the firmware

V version. D
STOP 1 2 sec.
(No disc) Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

DVD mode Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

STOP 7 2 sec.
(No disc) Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".

C-1
 SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
Ref. No. Part No. Parts Name Remarks
JG176 Up-Date Disc
JG176 APJG176144 Up-Date Disc Up-Date of the Firmware

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

1. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

2. Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

5. Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

6. Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.
At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon.
Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

7. After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

8. Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

9. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
10. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

11. Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

12. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
13. Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

F/W Ver. ADLJD8718A A D L J D 8 7 1 8 A

Initialize: Complete

Laser drive time

DVD LD: 0Hour Fixed Released times on the same date
CD LD : 0Hour
Release date (Example: 2008.07.18)

A = October
When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed. B = November
C = December
14. Turn off the power

C-2
 WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION
Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are
displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".
Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
4. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.
NOTE:The each item value might be different according to each set.

CHECK SUM: 403F Initial setting data check sum.

Sub Micon check version
Main Micon check version
LCD PWR ON: 0000 POWER ON total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)
SUB: DA0E783212 + (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)
+ (16 x tens digit value)
DTV: CA01I85291 + (ones digit value)

EEPROM check version EEPROM: J51T01PM00

Parameter Picture: pic_CA01I0003

FIG. 1
CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken
to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").
1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.
2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.
NOTE: No need to set data other position than 7200~79FF.
ADDRESS DATA

INIT : 0001 0099

SUB: DA0E783212

DTV: CA01I85291

EEPROM: J51T01PM00

FIG. 2
4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS
until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.
5. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".
6. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.
7. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
8. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.
9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10. Turn on the Power.
11. Set the VOLUME to minimum.
12. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.
13. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C-3
 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE NO. FUNCTION NO. FUNCTION
Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the 03 R DRIVE(N) 31 BAK LIGHT MIN
circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies. 04 R CUT OFF(N) 32 BRIGHTNESS CENT
05 G DRIVE(N) 33 BRIGHTNESS MAX
CAUTION 06 G CUT OFF(N) 34 BRIGHTNESS MIN
07 B DRIVE(N) 35 TINT
• Use an isolation transformer when performing any 36 SHARP H1 MAX
08 B CUT OFF(N)
service on this chassis. 09 R DRIVE(C) 37 SHARP H1 MIN
• When removing a PCB or related component, after 10 R CUT OFF(C) 38 SHARP H2 MAX
unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire 11 G DRIVE(C) 39 SHARP H2 MIN
back in its original position. 12 G CUT OFF(C) 40 SHARP V1 MAX
• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, 13 B DRIVE(C) 41 SHARP V1 MIN
apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat 14 B CUT OFF(C) 42 CONTRAST CENTER
sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the 15 R DRIVE(W) 43 CONTRAST MAX
16 R CUT OFF(W) 44 CONTRAST MIN
old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to 45 COLOR CENTER
17 G DRIVE(W)
the IC and Transistor). 18 G CUT OFF(W) 46 COLOR MAX
19 B DRIVE(W) 47 COLOR MIN
Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical 20 B CUT OFF(W) 50 CONTRAST 40
adjustments. 29 BAK LIGHT CENT
30 BAK LIGHT MAX
1. Pattern Generator
Fig. 1-2
On-Screen Display Adjustment
1. Set the VOLUME to minimum. 2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS
2. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the
channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2-1: WHITE BALANCE
2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as 1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 20 minutes.
shown in Fig. 1-1. 2. Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern
Generator.
3. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control
to set to the AV mode.
4. Using the remote control, set the brightness and
TV
FULL contrast to normal position.
480i 5. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-2 and
press the channel button (03) on the remote control to
select "R DRIVE(N)".
6. Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control
to select the "R DRIVE (N)", "R CUT OFF (N)",
Function 03 R DRIVE (N) 14 Step No.
"B DRIVE (N)", "B CUT OFF (N)", "R DRIVE (C)",
"R CUT OFF (C)", "B DRIVE (C)", "B CUT OFF (C)",
"R DRIVE (W)","R CUT OFF (W), "B DRIVE (W)" or
Fig. 1-1 "B CUTOFF(W)".
7. Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
3. Use the CH. UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) to whiten the R DRIVE (N), R CUT OFF (N),
on the remote control to select the options shown in B DRIVE (N), B CUT OFF (N), R DRIVE (C),
Fig. 1-2. R CUT OFF (C), B DRIVE (C), B CUT OFF (C),
4. Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to R DRIVE (W) ,R CUT OFF (W), B DRIVE (W) and
end the adjustments. B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.
5. To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, GAME, 8. Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white
COMPONENT and DVD mode, press the INPUT ZOOM color is achieved.
button on the remote control.
6. Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.
7. To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select
the digital channel.
8. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel
(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

D-1
 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-2: BRIGHT CENT
1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 8~11.
14. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
15. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
16. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
17. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
18. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".
19. Check if the picture is normal.
20. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
21. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 16~19.
22. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
23. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 16~19.
24. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
25. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
26. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
27. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (32) on the remote control to
select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".
28. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the brightness cent step No. becomes "110".
29. Check if the picture is normal.
D-2
2-3: CONTRAST MAX
1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "151".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "149".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "156".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast max step No. becomes "126".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (43) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST MAX".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast max step No. becomes "113".
33. Check if the picture is normal.
 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-4: CONTRAST CENTER
1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "112".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "116".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast cent step No. becomes "94".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 19~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 19~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (42) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST CENTER".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".
33. Check if the picture is normal.
D-3
2-5: CONTRAST 40
1. Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)
2. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
3. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
4. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "142".
5. Check if the picture is normal.
6. Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)
7. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV mode.
8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
9. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
10. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "141".
11. Check if the picture is normal.
12. Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)
13. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the AV(Y/C) mode.
14. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
15. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
16. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "148".
17. Check if the picture is normal.
18. Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
19. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode.
20. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
21. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
22. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control
until the contrast 40 step No. becomes "120".
23. Check if the picture is normal.
24. Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
25. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
26. Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)
27. Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to
set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above
adjustments 20~23.
28. Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)
29. Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to
the DVD mode.
30. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast
to normal position.
31. Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and
press the channel button (50) on the remote control to
select "CONTRAST 40".
32. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until
the contrast 40 step No. becomes "155".
33. Check if the picture is normal.
 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-6: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)
Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TV/AV/GAME/COMPONENT/DVD/DTV)

AV COMPONENT DTV
TV GAME DVD
NO. FUNCTION CVBS Y/C 480i 480p 720p 1080i 480i 480p 720p 1080i
Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No.
3 R.DRIVE (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
4 R.CUTOFF (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
5 G DRIVE (N) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 G CUTOFF (N) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 B DRIVE (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
8 B CUTOFF (N) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
9 R.DRIVE (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
10 R CUTOFF (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
11 G DRIVE (C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 G CUTOFF (C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 B DRIVE (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
14 B CUTOFF (C) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
15 R.DRIVE (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
16 R CUTOFF (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
17 G DRIVE (W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
18 G CUTOFF (W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
19 B RRIVE (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
20 B CUTOFF (W) * * * * * * * * * * * * *
29 BAK LIGHT CENT 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65
30 BAK LIGHT MAX 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89
31 BAK LIGHT MIN 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
32 BRIGHT CENT 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 110 128 128 128 128
33 BRIGHT MAX 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180
34 BRIGHT MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
35 TINT 128 122 122 122 121 122 129 129 122 115 118 115 122
36 SHARP H1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511
37 SHARP H1 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
38 SHARP H2 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511
39 SHARP H2 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
40 SHARP V1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511
41 SHARP V1 MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
42 CONT CENTER * * * * * * * * * * * * *
43 CONT MAX * * * * * * * * * * * * *
44 CONT MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
45 COLOR CENT 130 140 140 140 170 175 186 186 140 140 140 140 140
46 COLOR MAX 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
47 COLOR MIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
50 CONT 40 * * * * * * * * * * * * *

NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

D-4
 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL

DVD MT PCB
DVD DECK
CP8501

CP2301 CD2001

CP2302
CP8502
CP2303

CD2301

OPERATION PCB

CD502 CP2201

CP501
CD7005

OS7601
CP7601

REMOCON PCB

CP3002
CP8101

J8101 CP3001
CP2804
CP4301 TU5801
J8102

J8104

J4301
J8103

J501
CD6203
J301

CD301

POWER PCB
SPEAKER DIGITAL PCB
D-5
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

(LCD SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

Yes
Is F501 broken? Change F501.

No

No Check IC501 and peripheral

Is there voltage at pin
6 of IC501 21V? circuit.

Yes

Yes
Is R510 broken? Change R510.

No

Change POWER PCB.

E-1
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE APPEARS,

BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT
APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)

No
Is CD301 connected? Connect CD301.

Yes

Is there signal at pins Yes

Change SP301 and SP302.
1 and 4 of CD301?

No

Is there signal at pins Yes Check IC301 and peripheral

2 and 4 of IC301? circuit.

No

Is there signal at pins Yes

Check Connection of CP4301.
AA3 and AA4 of IC2801?

No

Is there signal at pins 1 Yes Check IC6551 and

and 2 of IC6551? peripheral circuit.

No

Is there signal at pin 6 Yes Check IC6552, IC6553 and

of IC6552, IC6553? peripheral circuit.

No

Is there signal at pin Yes

Check IC5801 and peripheral
5 of TU5801? circuit.

No

Change TU5801.

E-2
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR

No Is CD7005 connected ? No Connected CD7005

Does backlight shine?

Yes Yes

No Check IC7001 and

Is the signal pin 16
and 18 of IC7001 ? peripheral circuit.

Yes

No
Is the voltage at pin Check F7001.
20 of IC7001 12V ?

Yes

No
Is CD2804 connected? Connected CD2804.

Yes

No
Is there voltage at pins 1,2,3 Check Q3009 and peripheral
and 16,17 of CP2804 5V? circuit.

Yes

Is there signal at pins

7,9,10,12,13,22,23,25,26 Yes
and 28 of CP2804? Change V2801(PANEL).

No

Change DIGITAL PCB.

E-3
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE COLOR DOES NOT

APPEAR

No
Is setting of color
Adjust the color.
normal?

Yes

No
Is the color signal Receive the color signal.
received?

Yes

No
Is there color signal
Check IC2801 and
at IC2801?
peripheral circuit.

Yes

Change DIGITAL PCB.

E-4
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

(DVD SECTION)

DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD

PICTURE

Yes
Does this display
Check the disc.
logo picture?

No

Yes Check pins 8 and 10 of

Is there signal at pins 149
and 151 of IC4001? CP8501 and peripheral circuit.

No

Does IC4001 gets Yes

P.CON+3.3V and Change IC4001.
P.CON+1.8V?

No

Check P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V line.

E-5
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DISC DOES NOT EJECT

No Check pins 138 and 139

Does OSD appear Yes
Is remote key set of IC4001 and peripheral
on the screen? effectively? circuit.

Yes

Does this eject disc at No Is there signal at pins 4 No Check IC4001 and
change DVD DECK? and 5 of CP2302? peripheral circuit.

Yes Yes

Change DVD DECK. No

Is there signal at pins 1
and 2 of CP2302? Change IC2301.

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-6
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY DVD Change DVD DECK.

No

Yes Does CD2001 connect Yes Is the voltage between

Does this display
with CP2301 correctly? JG017 and JG018 less
"INCORRECT DISC"?
than 3.3V?

No No Yes

Connect CD2301.

Does this display No

Change IC4001.
reading mark?

Yes

No
Does disc rotate? Change DVD DECK.

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-7
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY CD

Change DVD DECK.

No

Yes Does CD2001 connect Yes Is the voltage between

Does this display
with CP2301 correctly? JG019 and JG018 less
"INCORRECT DISC"?
than 3.3V?

No No Yes

Connect CD2301.

Does this display No

Change IC4001.
reading mark?

Yes

No
Does disc rotate? Change DVD DECK.

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-8
 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG

AUDIO

Is there signal at pins No

113, 114, 115 and Change IC4001.
116 of IC4001?

Yes

No Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501

Is there signal at pins 1
and 7 of IC8501? and peripheral circuit.

Yes

No
Does CD8501 connected? Connected CD8501.

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL

AUDIO

Is there signal at pin1 Yes

of CP8501? Change MAIN PCB.

No

Yes
Is there signal at pin Check line circuit IC4001
122 of IC4001? to CP8501.

No

Change IC4001.

E-9
 DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

DVD LOADER
DSM2
LCD BLOCK

DUPRD1
MD_DVD, MD_CD TX
DUPTD1
RF, A, B, C, D, E, F RX
TIN_SW
START_SW
OPU SPDIF
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SPDIF-134
DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD IC4001 DAC_VIDEO_C/D
C_VIDEO
ZR36966ELCG-D-G DAC_VIDEO_A
TR+/-, FO+/-, SPINDLE/SLED/ Y_VIDEO
MOT_LD+/-, FOCUS/TRACK_PWM, RESET
SPINDLE/ MOT_SLED+/- TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN DVD RESET
Motor Drive SYS_MUTE
STEPING/ MOT_SPDL+/- ZERO
IC2301 SPDL_SENS+/-
SLED LA6565VR-TLM-E
MOTOR
AUDIO AMP DVD_AUDIO_L
HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW DVD_A_OUT_L
IC8501
APWM_L+/-, NJM4565M(TE1) DVD_AUDIO_R
DVD_A_OUT_R
APWM_R+/-
HA0~A19,
HD0~D15,
MEMCS0, RD, WR

SD_A0~A11
64M SDRAM
FLASH 16M SD_D0~D15 IC4005
IC4007 M12L64164A-7TG
SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,
CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS#
SD_BA0

F-1 F-2
 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

TRANSFORMER
L501 T501
CD501 J501 D510
F501
4 3 1 12 D515 CP501__3,13. AT+12V
AC IN
2 1
D518 C502 3 11 D523 CP501__4,5,14.
+
DC-DC CONVERTER
D505 5 8 IC503
LA5797M-TE-L-E
6
1 7 CP501__8.P.CON+32V

Q501 Q505 CP501__18. POWER FAIL

POWER CONTROL IC
IC501 FA5531P-A2 7 SOUND AMP 5 CP501__12.POWER_ON_H
1 ZCD VH 8 IC301
FEED BACK CP501__1.FILTER_MUTE
LA42052-E 1
2 FB 7 NC IC505
REGULATOR
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
3 IS Vcc 6 IC502 KIA431A-AT
4 GND OUT 5 4 1
3 2 3 1

CP501__10.INVERTER_H
CP501__9.LIGHT_CTL

T7001

5 CD7005__14.HV
DRIVE 1 6 CD7005__7.LV
Q7005 2 7 CD7005__8.LV
16
4 8 CD7005__1.HV
17

20
DRIVE
18
1 Q7004
8
11
9

DRIVE
4
INVERTER 13
Q7003 1
CONTROLLER 2
IC7001 14
BD9882FV-E2
FEED_BACK
IC7002 LM2902DR

F-3 F-4
 POWER(DIGITAL PCB) BLOCK DIAGRAM

5.0V REGULATOR 5.0V

IC3007
BD7820FP-E2

3.3V REGULATOR
IC3009
CP3001 S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
2
1 FILTER MUTE AT3.3V
6 DIGITAL TUNER
8 TUNER+30V TU5801
ENG36E18KRF
3 AT+12V
SUB MICON EEPROM
4 IC6202 IC2805
5 AT+5.8V R5F21124FP M24256-BWMN6TP
14
7
11
12 BTSC DEMODULATOR AUDIO ADC
13 IC5801 IC6551
15 AN5832SA-E1V AK5358A
16
17 VDD CORE 1V
9 LIGHT_CTL IC3001 1V
10 INVERTER_H BD9130NV SCALER IC
18 POWER FAIL IC2801
20 KEY_B R8J66954BG
19 KEY_A

VDD CORE 3.3V

IC3002
AL1015
SW
FLASH IC 1.8V REGULATOR DDR SDRAM
IC2804 IC3003 1.8V IC2802
EN29LV320AB-70TCP PQ035ZN1HZPH HYB18TC256160BF-3S
LCD+B SW LCD PANEL
Q3009 V2801
TPC6108(TE85L,F,M) M156B1-L02

AUDIO Lch SW AUDIO Rch SW AUDIO Lch SW AUDIO Rch SW

IC6552 IC6553 IC6557 IC6558
MM1501XNRE MM1501XNRE NJM2534V(TE2) NJM2534V(TE2)

F-5 F-6
 SIGNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

HEADPHONE JACK
J301
PJ-364H

SPEAKER L/R
SP301, SP302
SO308F01
COMPONENT Y
AMP L/R
COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
COMPONENT U
IN J8102
AUDIO L/R SOUND AMP IC
RCA-341H(NI)-09
COMPONENT V IC301
LA42052-E

AV 1 CVBS
CVBS _AV_IN
AV1_A_IN_L
J8104
IN RCA-341H(2)NI-06
AV1_A_IN_R AUDIO Lch SW IC
IC6557 AUDIO Lch SW IC AUDIO L
NJM2534V(TE2) IC6552
YUV AUDIO_L MM1501XNRE AUDIO DATA
LCD PANEL
COMPONENT AUDIO IN AUDIO ADC IC LVDS DATA/CLK
IN V2801
J8103 IC6551
M156B1-L02
RCA-228H(3)NI-02 YUV AUDIO_R AK5358A
AUDIO Rch SW IC AUDIO Rch SW IC AUDIO R
IC6558 IC6553
NJM2534V(TE2) MM1501XNRE

Y SW C SW SCALER IC
IC6554 IC6555 SW_C_IN IC2801
TUNER AUDIO R MM1501XNRE R8J66954BG
MM1501XNRE
BTSC DEMODULATOR IC
IC5801 TUNER AUDIO L
SIF AN5832SA -E1V
TUNER
DIGITAL RF (IF)
IN TU5801
ENG36E18KRF
ANALOG RF(CVBS)

SW_Y_IN
S-VIDEO-IN AV1_Y
IN J8101 AV1_C
DIN-417HA-01

DVD CP3002
19 RX
7 TX
14 DVD_A_OUT_R DIGITAL_A_SW
15 DVD_A_OUT_L IC6556 SPDIF
1 SPDIF-134 TC7PA53FU(T5L,FT)
16 [V]Y_VIDEO
17 [U]C_VIDEO
6 START_SW SUB MICON
4 DVD_RESET IC6202
R5F21124FP
2 ZERO

COAXIAL SPDIF_OUT
J4301
RCA-101HT(OR)

F-7 F-8
 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT (TOP SIDE) DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

DMG097A

R2306
R2318
R2355

B2305

B4016
C2323 C2326 R2341
CP2301_1 C2329 W813 R2340
R2309

Q2302
C2331

Q2301
CP2302 C2339 C2309 C2317
W803
C2340 C2316 R2350 C2321 C4059 W812
C2350
R2353 R4019 R4043

C2348
C2341 R2360
C4015

C4058 C4075 B4002 R4018 R4022

C2328 R2332

R2325
C4002 C4076
R2319 R2305 C2319 R2307 B4003 R2333

C4006
C4055 R4062 R4023
CP2303

R2330
C4085 R2342
R2327 C4086 C4004 C4057 C4033

R2337
1 157 R2349 R2324 R4002 R4061
R4001 R2326 C2360 C2358 R2352

C4010
C2307 C4037 R2335 R4063 C4003
C2357 R2328 W807 R4003 C4008
R2336

R2329
C4056

R2323
C4011 C4001 C4095
C4034 C4007 R2334
C2306 R4004 R4060

R2310
R2321 C2359 C2330 R2358
W836 R4005

C4064
R2357

X4001

IC2301
R4012 C8517 R4086
R2304 C2305

C4021
R2320

W804
R4042 C4028
C2303 C2304 R2313 R4045
R2302

C4062
C4091
C4035 R2303 C4079
C2365 R4078 C4060 C4039
D2303 IC4007
C2302 R4089
C8512
C8515 B8501

R2301
D2304 C4051 R4052 C4027 W860

R2338
IC4001

C2315
C2310 C4005 R4065

C4096
B4001
B4015 C2301

R2308

R4040
R2339 R4016 C4054 R4087

L8501
B4010

R8530 C4044 R4032 C4081

C4053
C8518
C4069 R8532 C4052

L8502
C4014

R8534 C8519 C8503 C4032

C8504

D4003
R4024

D4002
R4071

C4105
B8502

C8505
C8532 C8501 R4014 W841
C8534 R8508
R8517 C8513 R4067
C8506
C4012

R8509 R8507

D4005
C8530

R4048

CP8502
C8526
R8506 R8537 C4049
R8521 R4036 C4040 C4041
C4016 IC8501 C8539
C4042

R8523 C8521 R4037

C8529

IC8502
105 C8533 C8538 R8516 R4038
R8522 B8504

R4039
53 R4054 R4053
C4013 R8533 R8539
C8516

D4008
W825
C8531 B8503
C4024 R4009 C4077
R4008
C4029

C4022
C4020
C4019

R8529 R8535

W818
C4018 C4023 C4025 C4030 W824 IC4005

C8541
C8520
C4038 R8531 C8525 C8543 R8536

R8510
C4026
C4082
C4072

D8510 C8537 C8536

C8514
C4099

C4009 C4083 B4006 C8542

B4005

B4008 R8528
CP8501 C8528 C4036 C4045 C4046 C4047
C8527
DMG097A C4050
R8527

G-1 G-2
G-3
R6551
R6552
CP4301
W847

IC6556

R6581 R6584 R3039

R4301 R6590
R3038
R4306 C4301 R6582
C6568
C6579
C6581

J4301
C6564 W817
D3403

Q4301
W840
C6580

R6203 C6209 R4302 D3402

C4303
C6215 C6213 W815
CP3002

R6217
C5812 C5811
R4309
CP3001

W816

R4307
B4302

IC6201
R4310
C4306
C4304 IC6558 IC6557

9
1
D6205

R6204
C4302
R6210 C3043
R6236 IC6202 C5809 W818
R5801
R6502
R6501
C6584
C6553

17
25
R5802 L3004
C6218
C6571
C6570

W863 C3022
W865 R5804 C6569
IC6553 IC6552

C6210
W878
C3004
R3010

C5814
R5803
R3002
B6556

C3013
R2856
C5805
Q3005
Q3009
B3008

L5801
L3005
B4301

IC2805
C5834
C5835
C2968

C5833
C5839
C5840
C5841

C5837

Q6203
C5838
W826

C5804

Q3001
IC3007

IC5801

Q3002

Q6202 Q6201
C5817
C2806

C5830

R5813 C5824
C2946

C5818
C5823
R5811

B5802
C2939 C2921 C2923 C2802
C5827 C2924
C2914
C2937

C5825
C5826
B2821 B2811 B2820 W827
C2931

B2822
B2817
C2932

Q5802 Q5801 C2891

B2816
C2905 W849

R5810 D5803 R5808

R5812 D5804 R5809
R6561 R6562
C5806 B2815
W848

R6559 R6558
R2806

C2929
X2802
X2801

B5803
C2883
C6562
C6561

C2948
B5801
R2837

R2840 C2935 C2943 B2810

W804

B5804
W858 NR3602
CP2804

W802
C2940
C2925
R2900

W846 NR3601
C5855
B6552

C6555
R2838
A1

AA1

R3005 C2808
R2839
C2933

C2947
C2936
C2944

C2918

C6578 R2811
B6553

C6559 R2810
R5807

R3017
C3018
B6554

R3015
R3013
R2815
C5847
R5823

R2813
R2814
C3015 R2812
R5822

R5818

IC2801
IC3003 B2800
R5821

C2812
R5817

C5821 C5822

C2811
C2810

IC3001
C2880

C2809 C2800
C2816
A21

AA21

NR2808

C2814

C2815
C2813
W809
NR2811

NR2807
NR2810

R2800

B2803
C2959 C2965
L3002

R2830
R2824

R2846 R2850
R2825 W854
R2826 W855
CEH420A

B2808
NR2806

B2805
R2823

C2975 C2974
R2827

B2804
C2821
B2809

R2818 R2819 C2866 C2877

B2807

C2822
B2806

C2876 C2869
R1
A1

C2859
NR2805 IC2802
R9
A9

C2867 B3003

C2861
C2857
R2835 C2868
C2858
C2852

C2855
C2856 R2820

NR2809
R2817 C2882

CEH420A
C3016
C2854 C2851

R3008
DIGITAL (TOP SIDE)

C3031 C3027
C3029 C3024
C3026

R2829
R2836

C2849
C2853 C2846
C2850

C2848 C3048
C2872

R2851
C3056
R3009

R2852

R2828
C2879

C2919
C2871
R3018 R3016

NR6551 C2922
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

C2901 C2875
C2881 C2874

D3007
DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)

C2847 C2842

C3023
C2841

C2884 C2887
C2843

C2885 C2890

R6569
IC6551 C2894 C2807 L3003 L3001
C2942
C3047
R3007

C2900 C2904 C2898

C2896 C2902 D3005
X6551

C2909 C2913 C2917

C2941 R2809 C3049
C6556 C6560
C2949
C6557
C2920

C5853 C5852
C2908
C2910

C2911
C2907
C2906

C2912
R3629
C2903
R3631
R2807

R3630

C2957 C2926
C2927 R2802
R5825
R5824

C5819 C5801 C5803

CP2803

CP6201

W807
CP2801

C2950

C2951
R2872
R2873

W881
IC2804

R2842
R2841
R2874 R2801
C2945

NR2801 NR2803
C2934
R2805

NR2804 NR2802
C3055
C2938

R3033
B3014
R3032
R3034
IC3009

C3039

C3038 C3054
D3006

R3044
Q6204

B3023
B3022
TU5801

R6585 W857 C3065

R3042
R3045
R3041

R6583
Q3007

C3066
C6582 W856
Q3008 C6563
R3014

C3011 Q3006 C6566

R3022
R3020

C6565 C6205
R6219

C3019
C3014

C3012 R3040
R6215

R3035

Q3011
C3040

R3019
IC3002
C6551

R3012
R6214 R6205

C3006 R3024 R6227

R6223

Q3003 Q3004

B3015 C6573 R6228 R6206

R3023
Q3010

R3025 R6224 R6213

C6572

B3006 R6216
R6225
D3004 IC6554 IC6555 C6221
B3007 C6216
B3005
B3004
C3021
CD6203

B3017

C6212

X6201
C6575
C6576
C6577

C6574_1

Q3407

C5844
B6551

R5819
R5820
L5805
C5846

C5845
C6554

R3431
G-4
 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE SW
SOLDER SIDE

CD2301
SW2
D505

FH501
FH502
CD7005

W013 D518

C514
TH501 F501 DED020A

WH

YE
BR

GR
AS MARKED.

J501
R504 D507 C510 C507
- REPLACE
T7001 RISK OF FIRE

C506

D504
D510

W001
D7001
M2602 M2601

R509
C7030

C7033

C508
C502
D7002 D7007
W810
D7004 W023

W828
L501
R7039

D508
C7018

R7038

C7017
D7005 D7008
D7006 W014

R7047
W021

R7036
D7003

R510 W808
R7035

R7033 HS501_1

03
R508

R5
W022
R7014

R512
R7011

Q501
C525

W807

W819
W026

C518
W025

HS502_1
D515

B501
C513
W809

T501
D512 J8102
D7015

R505
W024 D511
D514

CD301
Q503

R511
R549

D526

W803
C520 W015
CEH421A

J8101
R518

C517 J8103
W010 IC505
R501
D517 D516
SH501 W822

W002

W827
C504

W824
C516
D523 W806
R529 IC501
IC502 IC301 HS301
W840

J8104
D7601_1
R521
W017

R8110
W008
W012

W833
W019
L504

CP8101 W823
W820
W004 W845
OS7601

C307

W007

R308
R309
W830
C512 C311
W832

C309
W835 C304

J301
W006
C522 C310
W018 C535_1
C7602
W011

L503
CEH423A

CD502 C511

SW2204
CP7601

SW2205

SW2207

SW2202

SW2208
SW2206
SW2201

CP2201
CP501 SW2203
CEH422A

G-5 G-6
G-7
C8106

R8120 R8103 C8111

C8102 C8104
R8117
R8114 R311
R310
R2203

C8107
R8119 C8105 R8113 R8116
R8105
R8111 R8115

R8104
C8103 R8112 C8108
C8109 R8106
R8108

C8110
R8107
R8118
R2206

C303

C305
C306 C308
CEH422A

C301

R305
R304
R2201
R2202

R2204
R2205

C319
R306
R307
R506

R544 R507
R545
R546 D506
C320
R547
R502

R302
C503
D509
C509

R513
SOLDER SIDE

C505 C501
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

R517

C526
R515

C521 R524
R523
R519
R525

Q7004
POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

C7032
D7013 D7018
R7046
D7024 R7050
F7001

D7023 C7022
R7045 R7049 C7026
D7020 D7019

D7014 D7017 R7015 R7016

C7031 R7024
R7044
Q7001

Q7002

Q7005

R7023
Q504

R7032 R7030 R531

C7001 R7002
Q505

R7022

R7009 R7005 C7011 R7003 R535

R7001

R7012 C7012 R538

R7043

C7004 R7019 D520 D519

Q7003

C7024 C7010
D7010 R7010 C545 C538
CEH421A

R7020 C531 C546

IC7001

R7041 C7013 R7007

C7006
C7021
R7054 R7021 R7008 D522
R7040 R7042 C7035R7056 R7013 R7017
C7003 C7008 C539 D521
C7015
IC503

C7019 C7002C7009 R543

IC7002

R7034 R7004
R7026
R533
C7020

R7025 C7007 R7018

R7006 R536 CEH423A
R7048 C543_1 R7602
D7012
R7605

D7011 R7604_1

R7603_1
G-8
 A B C D E F G H

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DVD MT PCB)

8 8

FOCUS_PWM
TRACK_PWM
SLED_PWM

SPDL_SENS+
SPINDLE_PWM

(VR_CD)MD_DVD
(VR_DVD) MD_CD

SPDL_SENS-
OPU_D
OPU_C
OPU_E

OPU_B
OPU_A
DVD_LD

OPU_F
CD_LD

VC

RF
JG001 C4038 0.01 B
JG002 VDDPWM

C4001 0.0039 B
0.027 B

C4057 180P CH
C4056 0.027 B
JG003 BOOT2

TACT_OFFSET
FACT_OFFSET

C4085 0.001 B
4.7K

R4018 4.7K
JG004 BOOT1
JG005 D4005
DUPTD1

C4003

R4019
JG006 MA111 DUPRD1
JG007 DUPTD0 (D_GND)

390 +-1%
JG008 DUPRD0 (AFEGND) (RF_GND)

560P CH

0.001 B
0.1 F
7 7

C4033

0.1 F

0.1 F
JG009 P.CON+5V_D

0.1 F
(A_GND)

11K
11K

39K

15K

C4058 0.001 B

0.001 B
0.01 B
10P CH
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K
4.7K

R4023

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

R4022 15K+-1% C4004

0.1 F

0.1 F

0.1 F
C4015

C4055

0.1 F
R4043
C4002
R4060
R4061

R4062

R4063
C4059
4.7K

C4086
C4006
C4105

R4037
R4038
R4036

R4039

C4075

C4076
C4021

C4072
V_SW

RFINN
RFINP
VDDDAC B4002 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (185mA)

B4016
VDDAFERF B4003 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (120mA)

MEMCS0
RD
HD9
HD1
HD8
HD0

HA0

(I2CDAT)
(I2CCLK)
FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

(P-H/I-L)

SGND
(D1_2)
(D1_1)
(21mA)

(MD)
(MC)
(ML)
+1.8V B4005 EBMS160808A102_RDC45 (130mA) P.CON+3.3V_D
+3.3V B4001 (10mA) VDDPWM3.3V
FROM/TO MEMORY EBMS160808A102_RDC45 TIN TIN_SW

4.7K
NC 0
NC 0
D4008 MA111

NC
0 NC

NC
NC
NC
NC

NC
NC
TRAY_OPEN
3.3
1.9
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.9
2.9
2.4

3.3

1.8

1.7
1.0

1.6
3.3
1.8
2.4
3.3

3.3

0.9
1.7
2.1

2.1
2.7
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3
3.3
2.3
2.3
3.3
1.6
1.6
C4007 0.1 F

0
6 TRAY_CLOSE 6

0
0
0
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
390 +-1% (RF_GND)
R4001 GND

R4045
+3.3V 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157

GNDPWM

VDDPWM
(D_GND)

MEMADD(0)
2.4

DVD_MD

GNDREF
0

RESLOAD
HD2

GNDAFE
VDDSAFE

GND1AFE
CD_MD
GNDC

VDDAFE
VDDC

DVD_LD
GPIO(63)/MEMCS2#
GND

CD_LD
GPIO(61)/FCU_IOWR#

VREF

105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
GPIO(60)/FCU_SCLK

GPIO(56)/FCU_RST

VC
GPIO(53)/PWMCO(4)
GPIO(52)/PWMCO(3)
GPIO(51)/PWMCO(2)

GPIO(50)/PWMCO(1)

GPIO(49)/PWMCO(0)

G
GPIO(59)/FCU_CS2#
GPIO(58)/FCU_CS3#
HA0 MEMDAT(2)

D
C
GPIO(62)/FCU_IORD#

GPIO(57)/FCU_WAIT#

K
E

B
F
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J
IGPIO(54)/PWMCO(5)
GNDDACBS2

IGPIO(55)/FCU_IRQ
HA1 HD10 2.4 1.3 DAC_VIDEO_C/D HOME
MEMDAT(10)/GPIO(0) RSET
HA2 HD3 2.2 1.3 TOUT_SW
MEMDAT(3) DAC1 W807 DVD_CD
HA3 HD11 2.2 3.3 DAC_VIDEO_D
HA4 MEMDAT(11)/GPIO(1) VDDDAC DAC_VIDEO_A DRVSB
HD4 1.7 1.2 YUV W806 RF
HA5 MEMDAT(4) DAC2
HA6 HD12 2.0 1.2 Y/C W807 OPU_A
MEMDAT(12)/GPIO(2) DAC3

75 +-1%

75 +-1%

75 +-1%

75 +-1%

75 +-1%
OPU_B

R4005

R4004

R4003

R4002
R4086
HA7 HD5 2.2 3.3
MEMDAT(5) VDDDAC OPU_C
HA8 HD13 1.2 1.1
HA9 MEMDAT(13)/GPIO(3) DAC4 OPU_D
HD6 1.9 0 OPU_E
HA10 MEMDAT(6) GNDDAC_D
HA11 HD14 1.5 1.1 OPU_F
MEMDAT(14)/GPIO(4) 208 VDDP 160 A DAC5
HA12 0 1.4 W836 C4034 27P CH W836 adjust VC
GNDC XIN SPDL_SENS-
HA13 HD7 2.5 207 GPIO(9)/MEMDAT(9) 159 VDD1AFE 1.6 R4042 100 X’tal frequrcy
X4001

R4012
HA14 MEMDAT(7) XO SPDL_SENS+

1M
HD15 1.9 1.8 100GT02727 C4044
HA15 MEMDAT(15) 206 MEMDAT(1) 158 RFN VDDPLL 52 MD_DVD
C4008 0.1 F 27MHz

6.3V 47
C4069
HA16 1.8 0 C4035 27P CH MD_CD
5 5

SJV
VDDC 157 RFP GNDPLL R4016 100 100P CH
HA17 C4010 0.1 F 3.3 205 GPIO(8)/MEMDAT(8) 3.3 C4028 0.1 F C4079 0.001 B RESET DVD_LD
VDDP RESET# CD_LD
HA18 HA16 2.5 0
HA19 MEMADD(16) 204 MEMDAT(0) GNDC SPINDLE_PWM
3.3 1.8 R4078 4.7K C4051 0.1 F C4091 100P CH SLED_PWM
NC MEMCS1#/GPIO(5) VDDC
HA15 0.7 203 MEMRD# 3.3 DUPRD1 TRACK_PWM
HD0 MEMADD(15) GPIO(48)/DUPRD1
HD1 HA14 0.6 3.3 R4089 4.7K DUPTD1 FOCUS_PWM
MEMADD(14) 202 MEMCS0# GPIO(47)/DUPTD1
HD2 HA13 0.6 3.3 D4002 MA111 DUPRD0
HD3 MEMADD(13) GPIO(46)/DUPRD0
HA12 1.0 3.3 C4027 0.01 B D4003 MA111 DUPTD0
HD4 MEMADD(12) GPIO(45)/PWMCO(5)/DUPTD0
HD5 HA11 2.5 3.3 C4005 56P CH
MEMADD(11) VDDP R4052 4.7K
HD6 HA10 0.7 3.3 IRRCV JG029
MEMADD(10) IGPIO(44)
HD7 HA9 1.0 3.3 R4065 4.7K
HD8 MEMADD(9) GPIO(43)/TDO SSCTXD
HA8 2.4 3.3 R4087 4.7K
HD9 MEMADD(8) GPIO(42)/TCK SSCCLK
WR 3.3 5V TOLERANT 3.3 R4032 4.7K
HD10 MEMWR# MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC GPIO(41)/TDI/NMI SSCRXD R4067 10K C4053
HD11 HA18 0 0

68P CH
68P CH
68P CH

(D_GND)

(A_GND)
MEMADD(18)/GPIO(6) IC4001 GPIO(40) 0.001 B TIN
HD12 HA17 2.8 0
MEMADD(17) ZR36966ELCG-D-G GPIO(39) C4096 0.001 B
HD13 B4015
HA7 1.7 3.3 (DVD-L/CD-H) DVD_CD
4 HD14
0
MEMADD(7) GPIO(38)
3.3 EBMS160808A102_RDC45
4
HD15 HA6 MEMADD(6) IGPIO(37)/TMS/NMI (MUTE-L) DRVSB FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

C4049
C4052
C4054
0 0 TOUT_SW
GNDC GPIO(36)
MEMCS0 HA5 1.7 0 C4011 100P CH C4032 0.001 B TRAY_CLOSE
RD MEMADD(5) 100 APWM6+/GPIO(14) 110 GNDAPWM GPIO(35) TRAY_OPEN (A_GND) GND
HA4 1.7 3.3 (D_GND)
WR MEMADD(4) GPIO(34)/RAMCKE/SPDIFIN C4037 100P CH C4081 0.1 F GND
HA3 1.7 101 APWM6-/GPIO(15) 111 IGPIO(23)/APWM2+ 3.3 R4024 4.7K HOME
SD_A0 MEMADD(3) 53 RAMADD(0) GPIO(33)/AIN/SPDIFIN SYS_MUTE
SD_A1 C4014 0.1 F 3.3 1.6 B4010 R4071 150 SPDIF DAC_VIDEO_A
VDDP 102 APWM5+/GPIO(16) 112 GPIO(24)/AOUT(2)/APWM2- GPIO(32)/SPDIFO
SD_A2 54 RAMADD(8) DAC_VIDEO_C/D
HA2 1.0 0 IABCLK EBMS160808A102_RDC45
SD_A3 MEMADD(2) 113 GPIO(25)/APWM1+ GPIO(31)/ABCLK NC 54 RESET
HA1 2.6 55 RAMADD(10) 103 APWM5-/GPIO(17) 0 NC IALRCLK
SD_A4 MEMADD(1) GPIO(30)/ALRCLK C4012 SPDIF
SD_A5 HA19 0 104 AIN/SPDIFIN/GPIO(18) 3.3 DUPRD1
MEMADD(19)/IGPIO(7) 56 VDDP VDDP
SD_A6 3.3 0 IAMCLK 0.01 B DUPTD1
USBVDD GPIO(29)/AMCLK NC
SD_A7 105 VDDAPWM 0 APWM_L+
SD_A8 0 NC USBDP/GPO(67) GNDC APWM_L-
106 GPIO(19)/PWMCO(5)/APWM4+ 104PIN FPCSTRB 1.6 APWM_L-
SD_A9 0 NC USBDN/GPO(68) GPIO(28)/AOUT(0)/APWM0- APWM_R+
SD_A10 0 1.6 APWM_L+ APWM_R-
USBGND 107 GPIO(20)/APWM4- FOR PLAYER GPIO(27)/APWM0+
SD_A11 SD_A4 1.6 1.6 APWM_R- P.CON+3.3V_D
RAMADD(4) GPIO(26)/AOUT(1)/APWM1-
SD_D0 P.CON+5V_D
RAMDQM2/RAMCKE/GPO(66)

3 SD_A3 1.6 108 GPIO(21)/APWM3+ 1.6 APWM_R+ 3

RAMCKE/SDI_PSC/GPIO(10)

SD_D1 RAMADD(3) P.CON+1.8V_D

SD_A5 1.6 0
SD_D2 RAMADD(5) 109 GPIO(22)/AOUT(3)/APWM3- NC
C4016 0.1 F 3.3 0
RAMADD(11)/GPO(64)

SD_D3 VDDIP 94PIN STBY_L NC

SD_D4 0 0
RAMCS1#/GPO(65)

APWM7+/GPIO(12)
APWM7-/GPIO(13)

GNDC FOR PLAYER

GPAIO/IGPIO(11)

SD_D5 SD_A2 0.7 0NC

SD_D6 RAMADD(2)
RAMDAT(10)

RAMDAT(11)

RAMDAT(12)

RAMDAT(13)

RAMDAT(14)

RAMDAT(15)

SD_A6 1.6 3.3

RAMADD(9)

RAMDAT(8)
RAMDAT(7)
RAMDAT(9)
RAMDAT(6)

RAMDAT(5)

RAMDAT(4)

RAMDAT(3)

RAMDAT(2)

RAMDAT(1)

RAMDAT(0)

SD_D7 RAMADD(6) NC
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#

GNDPCLK
RAMCS0#

VDDPCLK
RAMDQM

SD_A1 1.2 0
RAMWE#

SD_D8 RAMADD(1) NC
RAMBA
GNDC

GNDC

GNDC

GNDC

GNDC

SD_D9 SD_A7 1.6 0NC

VDDC
VDDP

VDDP

VDDP

VDDP
PCLK

RAMADD(7) R4009
SD_D10 C4013 0.1 F 1.8 3.3 C4026 0.1 F
SD_D11 VDDC
SD_D12 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 33
0.1 F
C4042

SD_D13
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
1.0

3.3

3.3

3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3

3.3
1.9

0.5
3.3
1.8
1.3
1.2
1.2
3.3

1.0
1.2
2.3
1.7
1.8
2.2
3.3

1.7
0.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.3
3.3
3.3

1.0

3.3

NC NC NC NC NC
SD_D14 R4054 NC NC NC
0
0

0
0

SD_D15 BOOTSEL1 B4006 (250mA)

RAMCS0# 1K
C4029 100P CH

EBMS160808A102_RDC45
0.01 B

RAMCS1# R4053
0.1 F

0.1 F
0.1 F

0.1 F
C4077 0.1 F

0.1 F

TP4010
0.1 F

RAMRAS#
4.7K

BOOTSEL2

6.3V 100 SJV

47

6.3V 220 SJV

2 RAMCAS# 1K 2
0.1 F
C4030

C4082

C4083
SD_BA0
C4024

C4025
C4018

C4019

RAMDQM
C4023
C4020
R4008
C4022

R4014

RAMWE#
RAMCLK
RAMCKE (D_GND)
W841

53

PCB130
DMG097
SYS_MUTE
RAMRAS#
RAMCAS#
RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMDQM
RAMWE#

RAMCKE
RAMCLK
SD_BA0

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15
SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_D8
SD_D7
SD_D9
SD_D6

SD_D5

SD_D4

SD_D3

SD_D2

SD_D1

SD_D0
SD_A0
SD_A8

SD_A9

1 1
DEBUG MODE DEL NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE RELEASE MODE ADD MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

A B C D E F G H
H-1 H-2
 A B C D E F G H

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

SD_A0
7 SD_A1 FLASH IC 16M 7
SD_A2
SD_A3 IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
SD_A4
HA16 2.5 0.7 HA15
SD_A5

48
A16 A15

1
SD_A6
SD_A7 C4064 3.3 0.6 HA14
SD_A8

47
VCCQ A14

2
SD_A9 0.1 F
SD_A10 64M SDRAM IC
0 0.6 HA13
SD_A11 IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG

46
VSS A13

3
SD_D0 C4036
SD_D1 0 3.3

54
VSS VDD

1
HD15 1.9 1.0 HA12
SD_D2

45
DQ15 A12 0.001 B

4
SD_D3 SD_D15 1.2 1.3 SD_D0

53
DQ15 DQ0

2
SD_D4 C4050
HD7 2.5 2.5 HA11 0 3.3
SD_D5

44

52
DQ7 A11 VSSQ VDDQ

3
SD_D6 0.01 B
SD_D7 SD_D14 1.2 1.2 SD_D1
6 6

51
DQ14 DQ1

4
HD14 1.5 0.7 HA10
SD_D8

43
DQ14 A10

6
SD_D9 SD_D13 1.7 0.8 SD_D2

50
DQ13 DQ2

5
SD_D10 C4040
HD6 1.9 1.0 HA9 3.3 0
SD_D11

42

49
DQ6 A9 VDDQ VSSQ

6
SD_D12 0.01 B
SD_D13 SD_D12 1.8 2.2 SD_D3

48
DQ12 DQ3

7
HD13 1.2 2.4 HA8
SD_D14

41
DQ13 A8

8
SD_D15 SD_D11 2.3 1.7 SD_D4

47
DQ11 DQ4

8
RAMCS0# 0 C4045
HD5 2.2 HA19 0 3.3
RAMCS1#

40

46
DQ5 A19 VSSQ VDDQ

9
RAMRAS# 0.1 F
RAMCAS# 0 SD_D10 1.0 1.2 SD_D5

45

10
2.0 DQ10 DQ5
SD_BA0 HD12

39

10
DQ12 A20 NC 1.2 1.2
RAMDQM SD_D9 SD_D6

44

11
DQ9 DQ6
RAMWE# C4041
HD4 1.7 3.3 WR 3.3 0
RAMCLK

38

11

43

12
DQ4 WE# VDDQ VSSQ
RAMCKE C4060 330P CH 0.01 B
C4062 SD_D8 1.8 1.3 SD_D7

42

13
5 3.3 0 DQ8 DQ7 5
RESET

37

12
VDD RP# 0 3.3 C4046
0.1 F

41

14
VSS VDD
HA0 3.3
2.2 C4039 0 1.9 0.1 F
HA1 HD11 RAMDQM

36

13

40

15
DQ11 VPP NC NC LDQM
HA2
0.1 F 1.8 3.3
HA3 3.3 RAMDQM RAMWE#

39

16
2.2 UDQM WE
HA4 HD3

35

14
DQ3 WP# 0.5 3.3
HA5 RAMCLK RAMCAS#

38

17
CLK CAS
HA6
2.4 0 W860 R4048 3.3 3.3
HA7 HD10 HA19 55 RAMRAS#

34

15

37

18
DQ10 A19 CKE RAS
HA8
4.7K 0 3.3
HA9 RAMCS1#

36

19
2.4 0 NC NC CS
HA10 HD2 HA18

33

16
DQ2 A18 0 0
HA11 SD_A11 SD_BA0

35

20
A11 BA0
HA12
HA13 HD9 1.9 2.8 HA17 SD_A9 0 3.3 RAMCS0#

32

17

34

21
DQ9 A17 A9 BA1
HA14
HA15 SD_A8 0 0 SD_A10

33

22
1.5 1.7 A8 A10/AP
HA16 HD1 HA7
4 4

31

18
DQ1 A7 1.6 1.0
HA17 SD_A7 SD_A0

32

23
A7 A0
HA18
HA19 HD8 1.5 0 HA6 SD_A6 1.6 1.2 SD_A1

30

19

31

24
DQ8 A6 A6 A1
HD0
HD1 SD_A5 1.6 0.7 SD_A2

30

25
1.5 1.7 A5 A2
HD2 HD0 HA5
29

20
DQ0 A5 1.6 1.6
HD3 SD_A4 SD_A3

29

26
A4 A3
HD4
2.9 1.7 0 3.3 C4047
HD5 RD HA4
28

21

28

27
DE# A4 VSS VDD
HD6
0.1 F
HD7 RAMCKE
HD8 0 1.7 HA3
27

22
VSS A3
HD9
HD10
HD11 MEMCS0 2.9 1.0 HA2
26

23
CE# A2
HD12
HD13
HD14 HA0 2.4 2.6 HA1
25

24
A0 A1
3 HD15 3
MEMCS0
R4040

4.7K

RD
WR
+3.3V

B4008
FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO EBMS160808A102_RDC45

6.3V 220 SJV

C4095
0.01 B

1 B
C4099

C4009
RESET
P.CON+3.3V_D
D_GND
GND

2 2

PCB130
DMG097

1 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DURING PLAYBACK.

A B C D E F G H
H-3 H-4
 A B C D E F G H

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8

DVD_CD

MD_DVD

(VR_DVD)

DVD_LD
MD_CD
VC

(VR_CD)

CD_LD
R2360
33
C2350 C2328

DSM2(06SD) 0.1 B
C2348 0.1 B
6.3V 22 SJV

C2329
FROM/TO LOADER
FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
6.3V 22 SJV
7 CP2301_1 VC 7
LD07T2-24ND-03 DVD_CD
C2331 0.1 B
1 GND DVD_LD

R2355
JG015 OPU_F

3.3K
2 F CD_LD
JG012 OPU_VREF RF
3 Vref
(RF_GND) (RF_GND)
JG026 GND
4 VCC (D_GND) (D_GND)
JG014 OPU_E GND
5 E
OPU_A

C2323
JG013 OPU_D

0.1 B
6 D OPU_B

6.3V 47 SJV
JG040 OPU_C
7 C OPU_C

C2316
JG025 DVD_CD OPU_D
8 SW1(DVD/CD)
JG016 RF OPU_E
9 VRF(RF_OUT)
JG011 OPU_B OPU_F
10 B W803
RF_A5V P.CON+A5V_D HOME
JG010 OPU_A
11 A TOUT_SW
JG027 DVD/VR W812
6 12 VR(DVD)
W813 P.CON+3.3V_D TIN_SW 6
13 VR COM MD_DVD
C2309

C2317
0.1 F

0.1 F

JG034 MD_CD
14 VR(CD)
VDDPWM3.3V
15 GND
DRVSB
JG035 CDLD
16 LD(CD) SPINDLE_PWM
FOCUS_PWM

R2336
0.1 F
JG036

C2326

390
17 PD/GND FOCUS_PWM
JG037 DVDLD TRACK_PWM R2339
18 LD(DVD) TRACK_PWM

TP2320
JG017 JG018

R2334
19 GND JG056 R2306 1.2K TRAY_CLOSE

10K
TRAY_OPEN
20 NC NC
6.8 SLED_PWM
TR+ TP2309
21 T DRV R2318
SPDL_SENS+
TR- TP2310 DVD LD CTL
22 T RTN 2.6 SPDL_SENS-
Q2301 6.8
FO+ TP2311

100 +-1%
23 F DRV KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P 1.9 R2332 R2313

R2335
R2309

R2319

R2324

3.3K
FO- TP2312

33K

1K
5 24 F RTN 5
220 TP2307 4.7K
2.3

R2307
R2301
DVDLD C2340 R2310

75K
1K
TP2305
6.3V 47 SJV 4.7K
TP2303 CDLD
CP2302 VC2

TP2322
TP2304 C2341 FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

R2308

10K
04_6232_105_015_800+
R2352

R2327
TP2319

TP2318
TIN_SW

R2321

R2326
6.3V 47 SJV R2320

5.6K

4.7K
15K
5 CLOSE TIN_SW
100 C2330
4 OPEN P.CON+A5V_D

R2305
0 4.7K

27K
R2353 10P CH R2333 P.CON+3.3V_D
3 GND(D) TOUT_SW 3.0
CD LD CTL (D_GND)
GND
2 LD- 100 Q2302 220
KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P 3.2 P.CON+6V_D
1 LD+ R2340 R2338
TP2308 M_GND
100P CH
C2321

R2350

4.7K
4.7K

6.8 0 4.1 3.2 3.2 1.6 0 NC 1.6 1.6 0 NC 1.6 0 NC 0 NC 0 0 0 NC 1.6 1.6 0 NC 1.8 1.6 1.6 0 NC

R2337
MOT_LD-

10K
MOT_LD+ 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23

LA6565VR-TLM-E
R2341

VCONT

MUTE1
4

REG-OUT
4

TP2316
MUTE234

VREF-OUT

VO_OP
VIN+OP
S-GND

REG-IN
VIN4

VIN-OP

VIN2+
VREF-IN
JG019

VIN4-

VIN2-
VIN3

VIN2
VIN3-
NC

NC

NC

NC
100P CH
C2339

P.CON+3.3V_D 6.8
B2305

MOTOR DRIVE IC
EBMS160808A102_RDC45

R2330

1K
R2342

4.7K

CP2303 TP2306

IC2301
04_6232_106_015_800+
(D_GND)

VIN1+A

VIN1-A
PGND2

PGND1
6 SW(GND)

VCCS
VCC2

VCC1
R2349

FWD

VD3-

VD2-

VD1-
VLD+

VD4+

VD3+

VD2+

VD1+

VIN 1
REV

VLD-

VD4-

TP2317
NC
HOME

NC
5 LIMIT SW
100 MOT_SLED-
4 SLD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
3 SLD+ MOT_SLED+
0 0 6.0 0 NC 1.9 1.9 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 0 0 3.7 1.7 2.6 2.7 0 NC 6.0 6.0 1.6 1.6 1.6 R2325
2 SP1- MOT_SPDL-
MOT_SPDL+ 6.8K
1 SP1+
3 3

TP2313

TP2314

TP2315
R2328
100P CH

100P CH
C2360
C2358

0.1 F

16V100 SJV

R2302 100 +-1%

4.7K

C2365 0.1 B
C2310
100P CH
C2319

C2306
C2301

0.1 F
C2315
100P CH

100P CH
C2357

C2359

0.1 F

R2357 1K
C2302 0.1 B
R2358

0.022 B

MA111

MA111
C2305

0.1 B
D2303
R2303 2.2

C2304

D2304
120
TP2301

TP2302

C2303 0.1 B C2307 0.1 B

R2304 2.2
JG057
2 2

R2323

R2329
1.2

1.2
JG058
TRAY_CLOSE
TRAY_OPEN

MOT_SPDL+

MOT_SLED+
MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SLED-
MOT_LD+
MOT_LD-

FO+
TR+

FO-
TR-

PCB130
DMG097

1
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS 1
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES DURING PLAYBACK.

A B C D E F G H
H-5 H-6
 A B C D E F G H

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DVD MT PCB) 8

FROM/TO REGULATOR
CP8502 (CP3002)
A2001WV2-8P
GND(M) 8
B8501
P.CON+6V_D P.CON+6V 7
BLM18PG121SN1D

16V100 SJV
P.CON+A5V 6

0.001 B
C8515

C8517
0.1 B

C8518
GND 5
B8504
P.CON+12V 4
M_GND EBMS160808A102_RDC45
7 FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP P.CON+3.3V 3 7
DAC_VIDEO_C/D C8505 P.CON+5V_D
DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO P.CON+3.3V 2

0.1 B
C8521
DAC_VIDEO_C/D L B8502
P.CON+A5V_D

0.001 B
12P CH GND 1

C8539
DAC_VIDEO_A 59 EBMS160808A102_RDC45
L8502

150P CH
RESET

150P CH
C8504

C8506

0.001 B
C8519
SYS_MUTE

C8503

0.1 B
1uHNLV25
DUPRD1
SPDIF
DUPTD1
APWM_L+
APWM_L-
APWM_R+
APWM_R-
P.CON+1.8V_D B8503
P.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D BLM18PG121SN1D
P.CON+5V_D
6 GND
(A_GND) 6
(D_GND)
GND
1.8V REG IC
IC8502
LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

0.001 B
C8520

C8538
ADJ OUT IN

2.2 B
1 2 3
0.6 1.8 3.2
FROM/TO MEMORY P.CON+1.8V_D

RESET
DAC_VIDEO_A W804 DAC_A[Y]_VIDEO

6.3V 100 SJV

2.2K +-1%
P.CON+3.3V_D

68 +-1%
1K +-1%
R8508

R8509
R8507
C8501

C8516
(D_GND)

1 F
GND 58
150P CH
C8512

5 FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE 5

P.CON+A5V_D
P.CON+3.3V_D
P.CON+6V_D
M_GND
TIN_SW
(D_GND)
GND
R8532 FROM/TO REGULATOR

47K
R8517 R8530 C8532 R8534 CP8501 (CP3002)
APWM_L-
A2001WR-14A
47K 2.2K 47P CH 15K DUPTD1 W825
SSCRXD/TX 14
0.0012 B
C8530

DUPRD1 W824
4 SSCTXD/RX 13 4
W818
R8521 GND 12
APWM_L+ TIN_SW START_SW 11
R8506 47K
[U]C_VIDEO 10
220 [V]Y_VIDEO 9
16V47 SJV
C8513

[Y]_VIDEO 8
56 RESET DVD RESET 7
C8534 R8539
DVD_A_OUT_L 6
16V10 SJV 1K
GND 5
0 4.3 4.3 6.9 DVD_A_OUT_R 4
16V47 SJV

D8510
150P CH

SYS_MUTE
R8510

C8525

C8514

4 3 2 1 ZERO 3
0.1 B

C8528
24K

R8528

R8537

10K
47K

A_GND

NJM4565M(TE1)

MA111
AUDIO_AMP IC

GND 2
- SPDIF
IC8501

3 + SPDIF-134 1 3
+
VCC
150P CH

-
R8516

R8527

C8527
10K

47K

5 6 7 8
4.3 4.3 6.9 10.9
C8526

0.1 B

560P CH

560P CH
57

0.01 B

0.01 B

0.01 B
C8542

C8537

C8536

C8543

C8541
R8522 C8533 R8536
APWM_R+
47K 16V10 SJV 1K
0.0012 B
C8529

R8535

10K

R8523 R8529 C8531 R8533

APWM_R-
2 47K 2.2K 47P CH 15K 2
R8531

47K

PCB130
DMG097

1 NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS
MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
1
DURING PLAYBACK. DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-7 H-8
 A B C D E F G H

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

7 7

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

3.3 3.3

S
MCU_SCITXD
SW

G
3.3 Q6201
2SK3019_TL 3.3 3.3

S
MCU_SCIRXD
SW

G
3.3 Q6202 I2C_DATA
2SK3019_TL
I2C_CLK
W863
6 W865
TO AV SWITCH
6
RESET_N

SUB MICON
CP6201 A2001WV2-9P
TX TO JACK
1 TX
MODE
2 MODE AUDIO_MUTE
AT+3.3V
3 VCC
4 CNVSS
RX
5 RX

R6215

R6219
4.7K

4.7K
6 CNVSS NC
RESET
7 RESET

C6210

0.1 B
R6214
8 GND

4.7K
5 5
9 NC NC 3.3 2.8 3.3 0 3.3 3.3 0 NC 0 NC
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 C6218 FROM/TO FLASH

3.3V_POWER_H

DVD_SCL
AVSS
KEY_B

DVD_SDA
VREF
DVD_CS
IVCC
3.3 3.3 0.1 B RESET_N

25

16
IIC_OFF
3.3 3.3 W807

26

15
DTV_RESET ASEMD0
R6236 4.7K
3.3 3.3

27

14
NC STBY-H
R6205 25 KEY_A
3.3

28

13
MODE NC
33K 32 MAIN_MICON_TXD DVD_POWER
R6210 3.3 3.3
15 ASEMD0

29

12
EXT_MUTE SYS_POWER_H
4.7K
R6206 2.5 9 DISC_IN_DET 3.3 R6227

30

11
AUDIO_MUTE EEPROM_SDA
4.7K 8 REMOCON_IN 100
4 0 3.3 R6223 FROM/TO REGULATOR 4

31

10
DVD_RESET 1 MAIN_MICON_RXD EEPROM_SCL
100 DVD_RESET

CNVSS

RESET

XOUT
3.3 0

VCC
32

VSS

9
3.3V_POWER_H

XIN
R6228
KEY_A
SUB MICON IC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4.7K
IC6202 3.3 0 3.3 3.1 0 2.8 3.3 3.3 R6224 KEY_B
NC NC R5F21124FP
PST3229NR

0 0 AT+5.8V

R6213
5 4 4.7K

4.7K
R6225 POWER_FAIL
NC NC
SYS_POWER_H
RESET IC

D5.0V 4.7K
START_SW
FROM/TO REMOCON IR_REMO LV_CTL
IC6201

OUT IN GND
CD6203 (CP7601) AT+3.3V
1 2 3
E8252002
C6221

0.1 B

GND
R6203 3.3 3.3 0
3 3

R6217
5 POWER ON LED D5.0V

4.7K
3.3 3.3 AT+3.3V 1
4 STANDBY LED 10K

100GT01615
SW
3 AT+3.3V

16MHz
Q6203

X6201
0 D6205
2 GND KRA103SRTK
1 REMOCON IN MA111

R6216

4.7K
R6204

10K

18P CH

20P CH
C6213

C6215
0
SW 3.3 STBY-H
Q6204
KRC102SRTK
0

4V100 V-S
C6209

2.2 B

0.01 B
C6205
C6212

C6216
0.1 B
(1608)

2 2

IR_REMO

AT+3.3V
STBY-H

D5.0V
ACCESSORY

PCBDH0
BT001 BT002 CEH420
MNAAA(R03) MNAAA(R03)
TM101
000-103000530
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
P201-2476-2 DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
1 CD501 1
P201-2476-2 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
A B C D E F G H
H-9 H-10
 A B C D E F G H

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

R2900
J1 PCVIN
C2925 0.1 B 10K
K1 SSIN1
FROM/TO JACK C2946 0.1 B 1.6
K2 SSIN2
C2937 0.1 B 2
SW_Y_IN 0.8
AV3/AV4_Y L1 VIN3A
AV1_CVBS TU_CVBS C2939 0.1 B 1.1
L2 VIN1A
7 AV3/AV4_PB C2938 0.1 B 3
1.2
7
AV1_CVBS L3 VIN2A
AV3/AV4_PR
SPDIF C2940 0.1 B 0
M1 VREFA
C2931 0.1 B 4
AV3/AV4_Y 1.7
M2 VIN4A
C2941 0.1 B 0
FROM/TO TUNER M3 VRPA

TU_CVBS C2932 0.1 B 5

SW_C_IN 2.0
N1 VIN2B
I2C_CLK
TO JACK
I2C_DATA NC N2 VIN6A
R2872 100K
C2926 0.1 B LOUT_FI
N3 VIN5A
R2873 100K
C2942 0.1 B 0 ROUT_FI
6 N4 VRMA 6
C2933 0.1 B 0
P1 VRPB DVD-H
FROM SCALER POWER
C2943 0.1 B 0
P2 VREFB
C2934 0.1 B 6
AD_A3.3V AV3/AV4_PB 1.9 TO AV SWITCH
P3 VIN3B
DVD-H
C2944 0.1 B ASW0
0.3
R1 VREFC DVD-H ASW2
C2935 0.1 B 0.2
R2 VRMB
C2927 0.1 B ROUT
FROM/TO AV SWITCH R3 VIN4B FROM/TO FLASH
C2936 0.1 B 0.2 LOUT
T1 VRPC
AV3/AV4_PR C2945 0.1 B 1.6 IIC_OFF
SW_Y_IN T2 VIN2C
I2C_CLK
SW_C_IN 7
5 I2C_DATA 5
MCLK C2947 0.1 B 0.2
U1 VRMC
SDOUT C2957 0.1 B FROM/TO MICON
U2 VIN3C
LRCK 3.3
C2929 R2837 SICL V9
AD_A3.3V 3.3 LPF MCU_SCIRXD
BCLK V1
0.1 B 1K MCU_SCITXD
I2C_CLK

R2852
3.3

10
W9 I2C_DATA

R2851

10
I2C_CLK FROM/TO REGULATOR
I2C_DATA
S1_DET
TWIRE_RXDC
4 TWIRE_TXDC 4
LIGHT_CTL
LCD-H
GND
D3.3V
AT+3.3V
3.3 ASW0
SCLK0(GPIO) AA8
R2801
3.3
SRXD0(GPIO) Y8
3.3 ASW2 4.7K ASW2
STXD0(GPIO) W8
R2850
LIGHT_CTL
R2846 4.7K C2959 C2965
QBLCA J21 3.0 BL_PWM
3.0 4.7K 0.1 B 0.1 B LCD-H
QBLCB(GPIO)J20
3.3 W855 TWIRE_RXDC
QBLCC(RXD0)J19
3 3.3 W854 TWIRE_TXDC 3
J18

Y7 RFAGC(GPIO)
DAC_VREF

3.3 MCU_SCIRXD
V8

SPDIFO

W6 ADATAO
3.3 MCU_SCITXD
ROUT
AA4 LOUT

ACLK
SCIRXD V7

Y6 LRCKO
AA6 BCKO
SANT
3.3 IIC_OFF
SCISCK(GPIO) W7
AA3
W3

W4

W5
V4

Y5

V5

V6
0

0
1.6
2.0
2.0

3.3

3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
0 3.3
A0 Vcc
R2838

8
R2840
4.7K

R2856 C2968
10K

0 0
A1 WP

7
0 3.3 10K 0.1 B
10V 22 V-S

A2 SCL

6
R2839

R2842
C2948

C2949

0.1 B

4.7K

0 3.3
10K

2 Vss SDA 2

5
EEP ROM
IC2805
M24256-BWMN6TP
220P CH

220P CH
C2950

C2951

R2841

DVD-H W881

R2874
10K

4.7K

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK
SDOUT
S1_DET

SPDIF
ROUT

MCLK
LOUT

LRCK
BCLK

PCBDH0
CEH420

1 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-11 H-12
 A B C D E F G H

TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
TU5801 ENG36E18KRF

23

25
20 IF_OUT1

21 IF_OUT2
NC(BB)

19 IF_AGC
18 IF_OUT
8 V_OUT
5 SIF-out

12 +30V
7 AGC

14 SDA

15 SCL

IF_O
16 AFT
9 +5V

17 +5V
NC

NC

NC

11 TU
1

4
22

24
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
1.0

1.0

5.0

30.0

5.0

5.0

2.5

5.0

1.0

0.6

1.4
8
W878
TU_CVBS

33P CH 22uHNLV25
L5801
7 7

6.3V 220 V-S

C5814
50V(2125)

0.1 B

0.1 B
C5803

C5804

C5805
0.1 B

22P CH

22P CH
C5806

C5809

C5811

C5812
1 F
C5801

FCM1608KF-102T02
6.3V 220 V-S
B5801

IF_OUT_1

IF_OUT_2
B5803

IF_AGC
FCM1608KF-102T02

R5801

150K
6 6

R5820

R5819
R5802
R5803

100

100
47K
100
R5804

100

0.01 B
C5845

C5844
0.01 B
B5802
FCM1608KF-102T02

C5846
SCALER IC
56P CH IC2801 R8J66954BG
L5805 W802 W846 1.4
AA1
0.22uHLQW18AN
ADIN1
5 5

R5824

47K
W804 W858 0.6
Y1 ADIN0
VSB_ADC

R5825

47K
1.6
W2 ADVREF0
1.6
Y2 ADVREF1
0.8
AA2 ADVREF2

C5852

C5853

C5855
0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B
FROM/TO REGULATOR
R5823
1.0
GND AA7 IF_AGC
4 1K 4
D5.0V
TUNER+30V TUNER_IF
D3.3V

C5847

0.1 B
R5817

R5818
3.3K

3.3K
TU_AFT 2.4
AA5 MCUADIN0 MCU_ADC

R5822
I2C0C 3.3
Y9 SICL0
R5821 47
I2C0D 3.3 IIC0
AA9 SIDA0
47
3 3
47P CH
47P CH
C5822

C5821

R5807
100K

C5819
B5804 6.3V 220 V-S
FCM1608KF-151T06 BTSC DEMODULATOR IC
R5808

IC5801 AN5832SA-E1V
4.7K

C5823 0.33 B 3.5 NC

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PILOT DET NC
R5809

C5818 R5813
4.7K

3.5 2.2 C5833 2.2 B

PLL L+R REF
MA111

0.22 B C5824 3.3K 0 2.8 C5834 0.033 B

D5803

VCC SAP DET

2.9 C5835 0.1 B
0.1 B NC NC NOISE DET
C5817
SIF_OUT 2.2
2 INPUT SIF/BB NC 2
MA111
D5804

BUFFER 0.001 B C5825 4.7 B 3.3

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SIF REF MUTE NC
Q5802
2SK3019_TL C5826 2.2 B 2.2
STEREO REF FOMO NC
R5810 100 5.0
D
S

I2C_DATA SDA/SAPID MODE NC

3.3 5.0 0
G

GND AGC SW NC
8

3.3 R5811 180K 5.0

NC PE IIC/PARA
7

R5812 100 5.0 2.4 C5837 0.022 B

D
S

I2C_CLK SCL/STID SPE FIL

6

3.3 5.0 C5827 2.2 B 1.7 2.4 C5838 0.1 B

G

AGC DET SPE DEL

5

3.3 PCBDH0
2.2 0.5 C5839 3.3 B
BUFFER ROUT SPE TIME CEH420
4

Q5801 2.2
LOUT WB DET
2.9 C5840 0.33 B
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME CAUTION :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY ARE
3

2SK3019_TL
NC NC WB TIME
0.5 C5841 10 C OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
2

TO AV SWITCH C5830 2.2 B 1.3 DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

L-R RBF NC NC
1

1 TU_AUDIO_R 1
TU_AUDIO_L NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-13 H-14
 A B C D E F G H

HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

7 7

SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

6 6
R3629
3.3
J2 EXT_RES
470

R3630
3.3
G4 HDMI_SCL10
4.7K

5 R3631 5
3.3
F3 HDMI_SDA10
4.7K

FROM/TO REGULATOR 0
E3 PWR0

D3.3V
0
GND E1 HDMI_XIN

NC E2 HDMI_XOUT

4 NC C1 PLL_XFC_A
4

NC D1 PLL_XFC_P

NC D2 PLL_XFC_X

NR3602 3.3
4D02WGJ0472TCE G3 RX1N
3.3
F2 RXCP
3.3
3 F1 RXCN 3
3.3
G2 RX0P

NR3601 3.3
4D02WGJ0472TCE G1 RX0N
3.3
H3 RX1P
3.3
H1 RX2N
3.3
H2 RX2P

2 2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
1 OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST 1
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-15 H-16
 A B C D E F G H

LVDS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

7 SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG 7

FROM/TO PANEL
LVDS1OUT0M A19 NC
CP2804
LVDS1OUT0P B19 NC A2006WV0-2X15P
B2806 NC NC 30
HCB1608KF-221T20 3.3 LVDS1OUT1M A20 NC NC 29
C15 PLLAVCC_1 NC

LVDS_CH1
LVDS1OUT1P A21 NC 28
RX0-
B2807
3.3 GND 27
A17 PLLAVCC_2
HCB1608KF-221T20 LVDS1OUT2M B20 NC 26
RX1+

16V10 V-S
16V10 V-S

C2874

C2880
0.1 B

0.1 B
6 6

C2974

C2975
LVDS1OUT2P B21 NC 25
RX2-
GND 24
FROM/TO REGULATOR 0
D14 PLLAVSS LVDS1CLKOUTM C19 NC
RXCLK+ 23
0

PLL POWER
GND A18 PLLAVSS LVDS1CLKOUTP D19 NC 22
RX3-
GND 21
D3.3V
B2808 LVDS1OUT3M C20 NC NC 20
1.0 NC
D1.0V E13 PLLDVDD_1 LVDS1OUT3P C21 NC
HCB1608KF-221T20 GND 19
VDD_PANEL B2809 GND 18
1.0
B17 PLLDVDD_2 LVDS1OUT4M D20 NC
VDD+5V 17
HCB1608KF-221T20

4V 47 V-S

4V 47 V-S
C2881
LVDS1OUT4P D21 NC

0.1 B
C2869

C2875

C2877
16

0.1 B
VDD+5V
NC NC 15
CH0_TXOUT0- GND 14
0
E14 PLLDVSS CH0_TXOUT0+
5 0 1.6
NR2811 RX0+ 13 5
D15 PLLDVSS LVDS0OUT0M E19 CRA108220JV
RX1- 12
1.6
LVDS0OUT0P F19 11
GND
1.4 CH0_TXOUT1- 10
E18 LPFP 1.6 CH0_TXOUT1+ RX2+
LVDS0OUT1M E20
CH0_TXOUT2- 9
R2835

1.6 RXCLK-
0 LVDS0OUT1P E21
1K

D18 REFR CH0_TXOUT2+ 8

GND
RX3+ 7
R2836
0.01 B

5.6K
C2868

NR2810
NC 6

LVDS_CH0
1.6 CRA108220JV NC
LVDS0OUT2M F20
1.6 NC NC 5
0 LVDS0OUT2P F21
D17 VSS33BIAS 4
GND
1.6 3
LVDS0CLKOUTM G18 CH0_TXCLKOUT- VDD+5V

LVDS POWER/REF
1.6
B2804 LVDS0CLKOUTP G19 CH0_TXCLKOUT+ VDD+5V 2
3.3 CH0_TXOUT3-
F17 VCC33BIAS 1
HCB1608KF-221T20 CH0_TXOUT3+ VDD+5V
4 1.6
R2800 4
B2805 LVDS0OUT3M G20
3.3 R2830
E17 VCC33LVDS 1.6 22
HCB1608KF-221T20 3.3 LVDS0OUT3P G21
F18 VCC33LVDS
10V 22 V-S

V2801
10V 22 V-S

22
C2871

C2876
C2866

C2879
0.1 B

0.1 B

M156B1-L02

0 LCD PANEL
E16 VSS33LVDS LVDS0OUT4M H20 NC
0
G17 VSS33LVDS
LVDS0OUT4P H21 NC
B2803
1.0
H17 VCC10LVDS
HCB1608KF-221T20
4V 47 V-S

LVDS
C2867

C2872

0.1 B

RSDSA H18 NC
RSDSB H19 NC CD2804
CHRU1803
0
J17 VSS10LVDS

3 3

B2800
HCB1608KF-181T20

6.3V 220 V-S

C2800
2 2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
1 1
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-17 H-18
 A B C D E F G H

SCALER POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

7 7

SCALER IC TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

IC2801 R8J66954BG AD_A3.3V

3.3
AVDDA J4
3.3 W848
AVDDB K4
B2810 3.3
3.3 AVDDC L4
E5 VCCQ33
3.3

4V 330 V-S
HCB1608KF-221T20 E6 VCCQ33
3.3

C2905
C2902

C2903

C2904
0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B
E11 VCCQ33
3.3 Io_Power
U5 VCCQ33
3.3
U8 VCCQ33

10V 22 V-S
0

C2890

C2887
C2883
ADVSS F5

0.1 B
1 B
6 ADVSS G5
0 6
0
ADVSS H4
W809 1.0 0
E7 VDD ADVSS J5
1.0
E9 VDD 0
1.0 ADVSS L5
E15 VDD

4V100 V-S
1.0
J9 VDD

C2882

C2898

C2894
1.0

1 B

0.1 B
J10 VDD
1.0 3.3 W849
J11 VDD PLLVDD P4
1.0
J12 VDD A3.3V
1.0

C2906

C2910
0.1 B
J13 VDD

1 B
1.0
K9 VDD
1.0
K13 VDD 0
1.0 Core_Power PLLVSS N5
L9 VDD
1.0 B2815 A3.3V
L13 VDD 3.3
1.0 DLLVDD T4
M9 VDD

C2907

C2911
1.0 HCB1608KF-121T20

0.1 B

1 B
M13 VDD

C2884

C2885

0.1 B
1.0

1 B
5 N9 VDD 0 5
1.0 DLLVSS P5
N10 VDD
1.0 B2816
N11 VDD
1.0 VCC33AD_A V3 3.3
N12 VDD

4V 330 V-S
1.0 HCB1608KF-121T20

C2908

C2912
0.1 B

C2914
N13 VDD

1 B
1.0
T5 VDD
1.0 VSS33AD_A W1 0
U6 VDD
1.0
U9 VDD B2817
3.3
VCC33DA_A Y4

C2909

C2913
HCB1608KF-121T20

0.1 B

1 B
C2896

C2900
0

0.1 B
1 B
VSS33DA_A Y3
B2820
3.3
VDD33 J3
HCB1608KF-121T20

10V22 V-S
3.3
VDD33 U4

C2917

C2920

C2923
0.1 B

0.1 B
B2811
3.3 0
M4 DVDDABC VSS33 H5
4 HCB1608KF-221T20
0
M5 DVSSABC 0
4
VSS33 R5
D3.3V
10V22 V-S
C2891

C2901

B2821
0.1 B

3.3
VDD33ADDAV2

10V22 V-S
HCB1608KF-121T20

C2918

C2921
0.1 B
0 0
E8 VSS VSS33ADDAU3
0
E10 VSS
0
E12 VSS B2822
0 1.8
K10 VSS VDD18 K3
0
K11 VSS 1.8 HCB1608KF-121T20
0 VDD18 T3
K12 VSS
0

10V22 V-S
L10 VSS GND D1.8V

C2924
0

C2919

C2922
0.1 B

0.1 B
L11 VSS
0
L12 VSS
0 0
M10 VSS VSS18 K5
0
3 M11 VSS 0 3
0 VSS18 R4
M12 VSS
0
U7 VSS

FROM/TO REGULATOR

D1.0V
D1.8V
GND
D3.3V

2 2

PCBDH0
CEH420

1 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-19 H-20
 A B C D E F G H

FLASH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

CP2803 A2001WV2-11P SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG

TCK TCK 1 D3.3V
3.3

RESET/MODE
RESET_N A1 RESET_N
TRST_N TRST_N 2
EEP/PC_TOOL_JIG_CON
CP2801 A2001WV2-7P TDO 3.3
TDO 3 E4 MODE0
7 D3.3V D3.3V ASEBRKAK_N R2807 10K
ASEBRKAK_N 4 0
PC_TOOL_TX F4 MODE1
6 PC_TOOL_TX TMS TMS 5 R2809 10K
PC_TOOL_RX ASEMD0 3.3
5 PC_TOOL_RX TDI C2808 B1 ASEMD0
TDI 6
4 IIC_OFF IIC_OFF RESET_N ASEBRKAK_N 0
RESET_N 7 0.01 B C2 ASEBRKAK_N
3 SDA I2C_DATA FLASH_WP

E10A DEBUG
FLASH_WP 8 TDO 0
I2C_CLK A2 TDO
2 SCL ASEMD0 ASEMD0 9
7 GND C2807 TDI 0 7
1 D_GND B2 TDI
GND 10
0.1 B TMS 0
VDD33 11 C3 TMS
TCK 3.3
D3 TCK
TRST_N 0
D4 TRST_N

D3.3V
W827 D3.3V_FLASH R2810
USB_CS 0
A6 WAIT_N(GPIO)

10V22 V-S
10K
WE0_N 3.3

C2802
C6 WE0_N
6 CS0_N 3.3
B9 CS0_N
6
RD_N 3.3
A9 RD_N
R2802

10K NEAR FLASH R2811

NOR FLASH IC 0
B6 A22(GPIO)
IC2804 EN29LV320AB-70TCP A21 3.3
10K D6 A21
A20 3.3
A5 A20
A16 3.3 3.3 A17 A19 3.3

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
A15 A16 D7 A19

1
R2805 A18 3.3
A15 3.3 3.3 NR2802 C7 A18
A14 BYTE# A17 3.3

2
CRA108100JV A14 A17
A14 3.3 0 10K A16 3.3
A13 VSS D15 B3 A16

3
A15 3.3
A13 3.3 3.3 D7 A3 A15
A12 DQ15/A-1 A14 3.3

4
D14 C4 A14
A12 3.3 3.3 A13 3.3
A11 DQ7 D6 B4 A13

5
A12 3.3
A11 3.3 3.3 A4 A12
A10 DQ14 A11 3.3

6
5 A10 3.3 3.3
NR2803
A10 3.3
D5 A11 5
A9 DQ6 CRA108100JV C5 A10

7
A9 3.3
A9 3.3 3.3 D13 B5 A9
A8 DQ13 A8 3.3

8
D5 B7 A8
A20 3.3 3.3 A7 3.3
A19 DQ5 D12 A7 A7
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A6 3.3
A21 3.3 3.3 D4 D8 A6
A20 DQ12 A5 3.3

FLASH I/F
C8 A5
WE0_N 3.3 3.3 A4 3.3
WE# DQ4 B8 A4
C2806 NR2804 A3 3.3
RESET_N 3.3 3.3 A8 A3
RESET# VCC CRA108100JV A2 3.3
D9 A2
NC 3.3 0.1 B D11 A1 3.3
A21/NC DQ11 C9 A1
0 3.3 D3
FLASH_WP WP#/ACC DQ3 D10
JG2801 3.3 D2
RY/BY# DQ10 INVERTER_H 3.3
B14 (GPIO)
A19 3.3 3.3
A18 DQ2
NR2801
A18 3.3 3.3
A17 DQ9 CRA108100JV
A8 3.3 3.3 D9 D15 3.3
A7 DQ1 A13 D15
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO D1 D14 3.3
4 A7 3.3 3.3 C13 D14 4
A6 DQ8 D8 D13 3.3
A12 D13
A6 3.3 3.3 D0 D12 3.3
A5 DQ0 C12 D12
IIC_OFF D11 3.3
A5 3.3 3.3 RD_N A11 D11
I2C_DATA A4 OE# D10 3.3
C11 D10

R2806
A4 3.3 0 D9 3.3

10K
I2C_CLK A3 VSS A10 D9
D8 3.3
A3 3.3 3.3 CS0_N C10 D8
A2 CE# D7 3.3
B13 D7
A2 3.3 3.3 D6 3.3
A1 A0 D13 D6
D5 3.3
FROM/TO JACK B12 D5
D4 3.3
D12 D4
A1 D3 3.3
A_MUTE B11 D3
D2 3.3
D11 D2
D1 3.3
B10 D1
D0 3.3
D10 D0
FROM/TO MICON

ASEMD0
3 IIC_OFF 3
RESET_N
PC_TOOL_RX JG2803 0
C16 M32TDI
PC_TOOL_TX JG2804 0

M32R DEBUG
FROM/TO REGULATOR D16 M32TDO
JG2805 0
INVERTER_H C17 M32TCK
D3.3V A_MUTE JG2806 3.3
C18 M32TMS
GND
JG2802 0
B18 M32TRST_N

NC C14 VCNT(GPIO)

27MHz CLK
C2809 R2812
GND 1.2
A16 XOUT

100GT02728
2 2

R2814
5P CH 1.8K

1M
27MHz
X2801
1.2
B16 XIN
C2810

7P CH
9

C2811 R2813
1.2
A15 XOUT25

25MHz CLK
20P CH 1.8K

R2815
PCBDH0

100GT02509

1M
25MHz
CEH420

X2802
1.2
B15 XIN25
C2812

22P CH
1 10 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-21 H-22
 A B C D E F G H

DDR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

R2823 27
DDR_SDRAM IC DARAS_N
IC2802 HYB18TC256160BF-3S
R2824 27 DACKE

DAA0 1.8 1.8 DAQ0 NR2805

M8 A0 DQ0 G8 SCALER IC IC2801 R8J66954BG CRA108270JV
DAA1 1.8 1.8 DAQ1
M3 A1 DQ1 G2 DABA1
DAA2 1.8 1.8 DAQ2
M7 A2 DQ2 H7 DAODT
DAA3 1.8 1.8 DAQ3 R2825 5.1
N2 A3 DQ3 H3 DACLK 1.6 1.8 DAA4
DAA4 1.8 1.8 DAQ4 W20 SDCLK SDODT V18
N8 A4 DQ4 H1 R2826 5.1 DAA12
DAA5 1.8 1.8 DAQ5 DACLK_N 1.6 SDCLK_N
N3 A5 DQ5 H9 W21
DAA6 1.8 1.8 DAQ6
N7 A6 DQ6 F1
7 DAA7 1.8 1.8 DAQ7 1.8 NR2806 7
P2 A7 DQ7 F9 SDBA0 AA19
DAA8 1.8 1.8 DAQ8 CRA108270JV
P8 A8 DQ8 C8 1.8 SDCKE 1.8
DAA9 1.8 DQ9 1.8 DAQ9 Y20 SDBA1 V17 DAA8
P3 A9 C2
DAA10 1.8 1.8 DAQ10 1.8 SDCS_N DAA6
M2 A10 DQ10 D7 V21
1.8 1.8 1.8 DAA0
DAA11 P7 DQ11 D3 DAQ11 V19 SDRAS_N
A11 R2827 DACS_N
DAA12 1.8 1.8 DAQ12 DACAS_N 1.8
R2 A12 DQ12 D1 Y21 SDCAS_N
1.8 DAQ13 27 1.8 1.8 NR2807
DQ13 D9 Y19 SDWE_N SDA0 U20
1.8 DAQ14 CRA108270JV
DQ14 B1 1.8 DAA2
1.8 SDA1 AA18
DAQ15 1.8 DAWE_N
DQ15 B9 SDA2 AA20 DABA0
1.8 DAA10
SDA3 AA17
DAQM0 1.8 1.8
DACLK P21 SDDM0 SDA4 U18
DAQM1 1.8 NR2808

R2817

R2820
L21 SDDM1 1.8
V16

160

160
DADQS0 1.8 1.6 SDA5 CRA108270JV
F7 LDQS CK J8 0 SDDM2 1.8
NC AA14 SDA6 U21 DAA1
DADQS0_N1.8 E8 LDQS CK K8
1.6 DACLK_N 0 1.8 DAA9
6 DADQS1 1.8 B7 1.8 DACS_N
NC AA11 SDDM3 SDA7 Y16 DAA3 6
UDQS CS L8 DADQS0 1.8 SDDQS0 1.8
N18 SDA8 T20 DAA7
DADQS1_N1.8 A8 UDQS 1.8 DARAS_N
RAS K7 DADQS1 1.8
K18 SDDQS1 1.8
DAQM0 1.8 1.8 DACAS_N SDA9 Y17
F3 LDM CAS L7 0 1.8
NC V13 SDDQS2 SDA10 Y18
DAQM1 1.8 1.8 DAODT
B3 UDM ODT K9 0 SDDQS3 1.8 NR2809
NC V10 SDA11 W16
DACKE 1.8 CRA108270JV
K2 CKE DADQS0_N 1.8 SDDQS0_N 1.8
N19 SDA12 T18 DAA11
DAWE_N 1.8 K3 WE 1.8
DADQS1_N K19 DAA5
DABA0 1.8 SDDQS1_N
L2 BA0 0 SDDQS2_N NC NC
NC W13
DABA1 1.8 0 NC NC
L3 BA1 NC W10 SDDQS3_N

5 0 5
A3 VSS
DAQ3 1.8

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B
0 R20 SDDQ0

1B

1B

1B

1B

1B
E3 VSS
DAQ1 1.8
0 R21 SDDQ1
J3 VSS
DAQ4 1.8

C2861
0 T21 SDDQ2

C2841

C2842

C2846

C2849

C2853

C2855

C2856

C2857

C2858
N1 VSS
DAQ5 1.8 FROM/TO REGULATOR
0 R18 SDDQ3
P9 VSS
DAQ0 1.8
0 P18 SDDQ4 GND
A7 VSSQ 1.8
VDD A1 DAQ2 1.8
0 1.8 R19 SDDQ5 D1.8V
B2 VSSQ VDD E1
1.8 DAQ7 1.8 VCCQ18 K20 1.8
0 VDD J9 N20 SDDQ6
0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B

0.1 B
B8 VSSQ 1.8
1B

VDD M9 DAQ6 1.8 0

0 1.8 P20 SDDQ7 VSS K17
D2 VSSQ VDD R1
1.8 DAQ12 1.8 0
0 VDDQA9 M20 SDDQ8 VSS L17
C2813

C2815

D8 VSSQ 1.8

C2843

C2847

C2848

C2852

C2854
VDDQC1 DAQ8 1.8 VSS 0
0 1.8 L18 SDDQ9 M19
E7 VSSQ VDDQC3
1.8 DAQ14 1.8 VCCQ18 M17 1.8
0 VDDQC7 L20 SDDQ10
F2 VSSQ 1.8
VDDQC9 DAQ10 1.8 SDVREF0 N17 0.9
4 0 M18 SDDQ11 4
F8 VSSQ VDDQE9 1.8
DAQ13 1.8 SDDQ12 VCCCQ18 P19 1.8
0 1.8 L19
H2 VSSQ VDDQG1 DAQ11 1.8 VSS 0
0 1.8 N21 SDDQ13 P17
H8 VSSQ VDDQG3
1.8 DAQ15 1.8 0
0.1 B

0 VDDQG7 K21 SDDQ14 VSS R17

J7 VSSDL
1B

1.8 1.8
VDDQG9 DAQ9 M21 SDDQ15 VCCQ18 T19 1.8
1.8
VDDLJ1 1.8 VCCQ18 T17 1.8
C2814

C2816

0.9 NC Y14 SDDQ16

VREFJ2 1.8 0
NC W15 SDDQ17 VSS U19
1.8 VSS 0
NC V14 SDDQ18 U17
1.8 1.8
NC V15 SDDQ19 VCCQ18 V20
1.8 VCCQ18 W19 1.8
NC R8 NC6 NC AA16 SDDQ20
1.8 VCCQ18 W18 1.8
NC R7 NC5 NC Y15 SDDQ21
1.8 VSS 0
NC R3 NC4 NC AA15 SDDQ22 W17
1.8 0
NC L1 NC3 NC Y13 SDDQ23 VSS AA21
3 NC E2 NC2 NC
1.8
V11 VSS U16
0 3
D1.8V SDDQ24
1.8 SDDQ25 VSS 0
NC A2 NC1 NC W11 U15
1.8 VCCQ18 U14 1.8
NC Y11 SDDQ26
1K +-1%
C2821

R2818
0.1 B

1.8 0
NC V12 SDDQ27 VSS W14
1.8 SDDQ28 0.9
NC AA13 SDVREF1 U13
1.8 1.8
NC AA12 SDDQ29 VCCQ18 W12

1K +-1%
1.8 0

R2828
VSS

C2850
NC Y12 SDDQ30 U12

0.1 B
1.8 VSS 0
NC AA10 SDDQ31 U11
1K +-1%

0
C2822

R2819

VSS Y10
0.1 B

VCCQ18 U10 1.8

1K +-1%
R2829
C2851

0.1 B
2 2
C2859

1 B
6.3V(2125)

PCBDH0
CEH420

1 NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED 1

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-23 H-24
 A B C D E F G H

JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

7 DVD-H 7
DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC
IC6556
FROM/TO REGULATOR
TC7PA53FU
R6551 FILTER_MUTE
DVD_SPDIF 2.9 3.3
B2 SW

6
DVD_SPDIF
100
B6551 D5.0V
0 3.3
GND VCC D3.3V

5
HCB1608KF-121T20 GND
R6552
SPDIF 2.9 3.3 SPDIF_OUT
B1 A

4
100

6.3V(2125)
C6554

4.7 B
6 6
TO AV SWITCH

AV1_Y
COAXIAL AV1_C
D AUDIO DRIVER J4301
AV1_A_IN_L
Q4301 RCA-101HT(OR)
AV1_A_IN_R
B4301 KTC3875S_Y_RTK R4309 C4304 B4302

E
D5.0V YUV_A_IN_L

1
FCM1608CF-600T06 5.0 2.8 YUV_A_IN_R

10V100 V-S
68 0.1 B FCM1608CF-600T06

R4302
C4302
3.2 1/10W

1.5K
C4301 R4301

100P CH
C4306
R4307

R4310

100K
0.022 B

220
R4306
0.1 B 2.2K

C4303

3.3K
5 FROM/TO JACK/OUT
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO
5
(CP8101) R3431
FILTER_MUTE AV1_CVBS
CP4301 TWG-P23P-A1
LOUT_SOUND 470 AV3/AV4_Y
23 LOUT
D3402 W840 AV3/AV4_PB
22 GND A_MUTE
AV3/AV4_PR
ROUT_SOUND MUTE SW 5.8 MA111
21 ROUT SPDIF
Q3407 D3403
20 GND KRC102SRTK AUDIO_MUTE DVD-H
AV3/AV4_PR 0
19 AV3_V MA111 LOUT_FI
0
ROUT_FI
18 GND
17 AV3_U AV3/AV4_PB
16 GND
AV3/AV4_Y FROM FLASH
15 AV3_Y
4 14 GND A_MUTE 4
13 AV1_C AV1_C
12 GND
11 AV1_Y AV1_Y
FROM MICON
10 GND
9 YUV L IN YUV_A_IN_L AUDIO_MUTE
8 GND
7 YUV R IN YUV_A_IN_R
6 GND
5 CVBS1 AV1_CVBS
4 GND
3 AV1 L IN AV1_A_IN_L
2 GND ROUT_SOUND ROUT_FI
3 1 AV1 R IN AV1_A_IN_R LOUT_SOUND LOUT_FI 3

2 2

PCBDH0
CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
1 WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. 1

A B C D E F G H
H-25 H-26
 A B C D E F G H

AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8

SW+12V
R6502
Lch SW IC

R6581
16V220 V-S

R6584
56K

56K
IC6557 NJM2534V

C6564
330 DVD-H
7 C6581
7
R6501 Lch SW IC 0 6.5 AV1_A_IN_L

1
IC6552 MM1501XNRE 1 B
330
3.3 C6570 6.5 BUFFER
3.3 16V(1608)
4.5 SW_L ASW2

2
L
1B
13
R6558 R6562 4.5 BUFFER 16V(1608) 12.0 6.6 C6579
AUDIO_L 0 YUV_A_IN_L

3
3.3K 2.7K 1B

16V(1608)
BAIAS

C6551
FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

1 B
14 12.0 C6565 6.5 3.3 16V(1608)
R6559 R6561 VCC
H 4.5 DVD_L ASW0

4
AUDIO_R LRCK

R6583

R6585
1B

10K

10K
3.3K 2.7K 16V(1608) SDOUT

16V(1608)
C6563

1 B
BCLK
C6553 MCLK
TU_AUDIO_L
1B ASW0
AUDIO_ADC IC
6 IC6551 AK5358A
16V(1608) SW_Y_IN 6
C6562 SW_C_IN
3.8 0 Rch SW IC Rch SW IC

16
AINR CKS0
1

IC6553 MM1501XNRE IC6558 NJM2534V ASW2

1B
C6571 C6568 DVD-H
C6561 16V(1608) 3.3 4.5 0 6.5 AV1_A_IN_R
3.8 0

1
1

6
CKS2 15
2

AINL L
1B
1B 1B
BUFFER 16V(1608) BUFFER 16V(1608)
16V(1608) 4.5 0 SW_R 6.5 3.3
5.0 3.3

2
2

5
14

CKS1 DIF
3

C6566 C6580
12.0 H 4.5 DVD_R 12.0 6.6 YUV_A_IN_R
C6557 2.2 B (1608) 2.5 3.3

3
VCC FROM TUNER

4
13

VCOM PDN
4

1B BAIAS 1B
16V(1608)

R6590
16V(1608) 6.5 3.3

56K
0 3.3 TU_AUDIO_L

16V(1608)

4
12

AGND SCLK
5

C6582

1 B
TU_AUDIO_R
C6555 R6569 C6584
5.0 1.2 TU_AUDIO_R
5 5
11

VA MCLK
6

16V10 V-S 100 1B

R6582
C6556 100DT01217 16V(1608)

56K
3.3 3.3
10

VD LRCK
7

X6551
0.1 B 12.288MHz
0 3.3 NC
DGND SDTO
8

C6559 2 1
SW_Y_IN FROM JACK
16V10 V-S Y SW IC
3 4
IC6554 MM1501XNRE AV1_Y
OUT VCC C6578
FCM1608KF-102T02

FCM1608KF-102T02

C6560
C6574_1 AV1_C
0.1 B 0/3.3 4.5 AV1_Y

6
FCM1608CF-600T06
1B L
AV1_A_IN_L
10 B
B6552

B6553

BUFFER 2125 AV1_A_IN_R

4.5 0
B6554

5
YUV_A_IN_L
C6575 YUV_A_IN_R
5.0 H 4.5 DVD_Y
4 VCC
4

4
RESET_N 10 C
2125
NR6551 C6572
CRA108470JV
MCLK 1 B
SDOUT DVD-H
LRCK
BCLK
D5.0V B6556
HCB1608KF-181T20

C6569

1 B
FROM MICON

RESET_N
SW_C_IN

3 C SW IC 3
IC6555 MM1501XNRE
C6577
0/3.3 4.5 AV1_C

6
L
10 C
BUFFER 2125 FROM/TO REGULATOR
4.5 0

5
DVD_Y
C6576
5.0 H 4.5 DVD_C
VCC DVD_C

4
10 C
DVD_L
2125
C6573 DVD_R
SW+12V
1 B
GND
D3.3V
2 D5.0V 2

PCBDH0
CEH420

1 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-27 H-28
 A B C D E F G H

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (DIGITAL PCB) 8
FROM/TO POWER
CP3001(CP501)
A2006WV0-2x10P
KEY_B IC
20 KEY-B
VCC1.0V DC/DC
19 KEY-A KEY_A
POWER_FAIL R3016 R3018
18 POWER_FAIL L3001
D3005 D3007
17 GND AT+5.8V 1.8K +-1% 150 +-1%
16 GND EC11FS4 EC11FS4 22uH
W815 TSL0808
15 GND
W816 AT+5.8V VDD CORE 1.05V IC
14 AT+5.8V FROM/TO HDMI
IC3001 BD9130NV

C3056

1 B
7 13 AT+12V D3.3V 7
R3005 0.8 3.0
POWER_ON_H ADJ EN

8
12 POWER_ON-H LV_CTL (typ 1.8A) GND
3.3 3.3
S1_DET VCC PVCC L3002

7
11 S_DET 1K
0.3 1.0 B3003 D1.0V
INVERTER_H ITH SW

6
R3008
10 INVERTER_H HCB1608KF-181T20 FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

10K
0 0 5.2uHCDRH104R
LIGHT_CTL GND PGND

5
4.7K +-1%
9 LIGHT_CTL
W818 S1_DET

C3015

0.1 B

R3009
TUNER+30V

6.3V(2125)

6.3V(2125)
10V(2125)

10V(2125)

10V(2125)
8 P.CON+32V AT+3.3V

C3029

C3031

22 B
C3024

C3026

C3027
680P CH

10 C

10 C

10 C

22 B
LIGHT_CTL

C3016
7 M_GND
D3.3V
6 GND TWIRE_TXDC
GND TWIRE_RXDC
5 AT+5.8V for LCD PANEL B3008 D3006
R3002 HCB1608KF-181T20 EC31QS04 LCD-H
VDD_PANEL GND
4 AT+5.8V GND
W817 AT+12V 0 5.2 5.2 W826
3 AT+12V 6.8K
3 2 1
2 NC FROM/TO TUNER
LCD+B_SW
FILTER_MUTE G D D
1 FILTER_MUTE Q3005
6 0 KRC102SRTK LCD+B_SW TUNER+30V 6
Q3009 D3.3V

R3010
LCD-H 3.0

8.2K
TPC6108 D5.0V
NC 0 5.8
GND
S D D 3 2 1
0
4 5 6
NC GND SW 3.3V REGULATOR IC
5.8 5.2 5.2 FROM/TO FLASH
IC3009

C3004

B
S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG D3.3V

1
INVERTER_H
IN OUT
GND
4 5
5.8 3.3
FROM/TO LVDS
AT+5.8V AT+3.3V
AT+5.8V
D3.3V

C3054

C3055
5.0V REGULATOR IC D1.0V

4.7 B

4.7 B
IC3007 BD7820FP VDD_PANEL
5 GND 5

FROM/TO MICON
GND

OUT
CTL

ADJ
LV_CTL
IN

SYS_POWER_H
1 2 6 4 5 3.3V_POWER_H
5.8 5.8 0 5.0 0.8 AT+3.3V
KEY_A
POWER_ON_H KEY_B
R3032
POWER_FAIL
B3014 VCC+3.3V DC/DC DVD_RESET
3.9K
HCB1608KF-181T20 L3004 START_SW
+-1% D5.0V 22uHCDRH104R AT+5.8V
R3022 for CORE
AT+12V
R3033

D5.0V
+-1%
470

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO GND

3.3
5.8

3.3
0.047 1/4W 2125
C3038

C3039

L3005
2125
1 B

10 B

Q3011 TPC6108
12.0 12.0 SW+12V 4 5 6
4 CP3002(CP8501,CP8502) AT+5.8V 4
SW
R3034

R3041
+-1%

A2006WV0-2X12P

HCB1608KF-181T20
C3013 R3020 S D D FROM/TO SCALER POWER

DC DC FET

HCB1608KF-181T20
22K
220

22uH

C3021 0.001 B
DVD_SPDIF Q3007
1 SPDIF-134 0 TSL0808
KTA1664-Y-RTF/P
6.3V 68 CD 0.047 1/4W 2125

R3014
W847 D3.3V

3.3K
2 ZERO NC

B3004

B3005
D1.8V
R3045

3 GND VDD CORE 1.8V IC G D D D1.0V

4.7K

R3042

4.7K

DVD_RESET IC3002 AL1015 GND

4 DVD_RESET 3 2 1
R3044 SW C3014 5.8 C3019
5 GND Q3004 5.8

3.3

3.3
VIN CS

6.2
1

8
10K START_SW KRC103SRTK 1.2 B3006
6 START_SW 0.1 B 4.5 0.1 B FROM/TO AV SWITCH
0 V5/PWON EXT

7
B3022 SW
TWIRE_TXDC 1.2 0 HCB1608KF-181T20
7 TX Q3008 5.8 4.5 Vref/SS GND

6
FCM1608KF-102T02 KRC102SRTK 1.3 R3024 R3025 B3007
8 DVD_STATUS_1 NC 0 1.2 D3.3V SW+12V
CC FB

12K

5
0 1.5K 220 HCB1608KF-181T20 DVD_R

R3012 1K
9 GND
SW 0 +-1% +-1% DVD_L
10 P.CON+3.3V DVD+3.3V Q3003 DVD_Y

R3019
C3012 0.1 B

EC31QS04
1K +-1%
(1608)

R3023
KRC103SRTK 0 DVD_C

C3011

D3004

4V82 CD
11 GND

0.1 B
D5.0V

C3022
MOTOR+6V 3.3V_POWER_H
3 12 P.CON+6V B3017 D3.3V 3

0.033 B
3.3 DVD+3.3V

C3006
B3015 GND
13 GND R3035 0 HCB1608KF-181T20
HCB1608KF-181T20
14 DVD_A_OUT_R DVD_R
6.8K 0 6.0 6.0
DVD_L FROM/TO DDR
15 DVD_A_OUT_L 3 2 1
DVD_Y D1.8V
0.33 B

16 [V]Y_VIDEO G D D
GND
8.2K

DVD_C
6.3V 220 V-S

17 [U]C_VIDEO MOTOR+6V_SW
C3043

B3023 Q3010
18 GND
FCM1608KF-102T02 RTQ035P02
C3040

TWIRE_RXDC 0
R3040

19 RX LCD+B_SW IC L3003
5.8 S D D (DDR2:typ 1095mA)
Q3006 D1.8V FROM/TO JACK
20 CS NC 4 5 6 1.8V_REGULATOR IC
KRC101S-RTK
21 P.CON+3.3V 0 5.8 6.0 6.0 IC3003 22uH D3.3V
W856 SW+12V AT+5.8V PQ035ZN1HZPH V_IN VB V_OUT V_ADJ GND TSL0808 D5.0V

6.3V 330 TZV

22 P.CON+12V
DVD_SPDIF

4V330 V-S
1 2 6 4 5

C3049

C3048
23 P.CON+A5V FILTER_MUTE

3.0

0
3.3

1.8
W857 MOTOR_GND

1.3
GND
2 24 GND(M) 2
10P CH

10P CH

R3015 R3017 GND

AT+5.8V 5.8 5.8 POWER_ON_H
75
75

SW R3007
TO DVD PCB D3.3V 6.8K 150
CD3002 Q3002
330 +-1% +-1%
KRA101SRTK 0
C3065

C3066

E82O1101
R3039
R3038

C3047 4V47 V-S

0

C3023 2.2 B
SYS_POWER_H

C3018 2.2 B

3.3K
3.3
0
SW

R3013
Q3001 PCBDH0
KRC102SRTK CEH420

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
1 OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR 1
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-29 H-30
 A B C D E F G H

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8

INV+B FROM/TO BACKLIGHT INVERTER

12M 1W

250V 0.001 KX

250V 0.001 KX
INV_GND POWER_ON_H

R503
INV+B

C507

C510
POWER_ON_H
INV_GND
SMALL INV_SGND LIGHT_CTL
T501 81240018 D515

W828
FCHS10A08 INVERTER_H
J501 169.0 12.0
1 12 INV_SGND

1
CCT2302-0901C

275V 0.22 ECQUL

2
W808 D520 GND

275V 0.1 ECQUL

ENE241D-10A-Q6
D508 D510

16V1000 HD
NC

3
5.8

1.2M 1W RCR
DC-DC CONVERTER
1

7 NC 2 11 7

25V 0.15 B
C525
4 3 RM11C-EIC RM11C-EIC SW IC503 MA111

D504

C508

R509
C506

C545
D507 D518 Q503 LA5797M-TE-L-E
169.0 0 FROM/TO SOUND AMP
2 1 3 10 KRA103MAT C538 D519
F501 0
2

C502 200V 270 KXW

NC RM11C-EIC RM11C-EIC 12.0
51MS040L V_IN VRET

8
W810 12.0 12.0 25V0.15 B MA111 POWER_ON_H

0.22 1W
0
9 C539 D522
COIL,LINE FILTER 0 0 0 SOUND+B
4A125V TH501 EN CPOUT

7
L501 SW
FH501 FH502 5D2-08LCS SOUND_GND

25V 0.15 B
12.0 25V0.15 B MA111

25V 1 B
SS24H-10100 0 Q504

C531
EYF-52BCY EYF-52BCY 5 8 0

C546
KRC103SRTK 3.0 0 FILTER_MUTE

R510

10K +-1%
NC NC GND

6
0 GND

R533
0

1N4005-EIC
6 7 D521
0 P.CON+32V
4A 125V 1.3
D505
NC NC FB

5
R536 R543 MA111
L503
SWITCHING D523 FROM/TO JACK OUT
220K +-1% 22K
Q501 FCQ10A04 22uH

400V0.022 PP
STF10NK50Z C543_1 1 B 50V(21-25)
22K 1/2W

100K 1/2W

100K 1/2W
D 169.0 TSL0808

2KV470P R
6 6

1
R504

S_DET

R508

R512

C518
20.0 G AT+12V

C513

2
L504 GND

3
S 1.8 AT+5.8V

10V2200 HD
33 1/4W

16V220 MHE

16V100 MHE
10uH
R505

R506

16V220 MHE
100 1/4W
HS502_1
33K

C504
W807
22K 1/2W

TSL0808

C535_1
R518
763WSA0068
R501

C511

C512
SARS01-V1
D512
R502 R544 2 1/4W +-1% NC
B501 GND
150 (21-25)
R545 2 1/4W +-1% W4BRH3.5X6X1.0 D516 C520

100 1/4W
R531
W840 M_GND

10K
(21-25) 1H3-E 50V 4.7 MHE_P

R521
POWER FAIL SW

R538

10K
R546 2 1/4W +-1% 5.8 Q505
D517 R529
(21-25) KTA1504S_Y_RTK
R547 2 1/4W +-1% MTZJ12B 2.2K 1/4W 5.8
R535
EC11FS2-TE12L

4.0 POWER_FAIL
5 5
R507

POWER CONTORL 8.2K

D506

100

IC501 D514 W835 SOUND+B

FA5531P-A2

16V 1000 HD
RU3AM-EIC

C522
5.7 169.0
ZCD VH
1

2.8 SOUND_GND
FB NC NC
2

R511 C517
1.8 21.0
IS VCC
3

1K 1/4W

33 1/4W 330P B
R549

0 21.3
GND OUT
4

D511
50V 47 MHE_P
UDZSNP33B
330P CH

1H3-E
0.001 B

22P CH
C501

C503

C505

HS501_1 R517
D509

C509

MTZJ22B
0.1 B
C516

R513
763WSA0068
82K
D526

4 1K 4

R515

1K

360 +-1%

0.001 B
NC

R524

C526
C521 R519
FROM/TO REGULATOR
FEED BACK 0.1 B 10K
IC505 CP501(CP3001)
PS2561AL1-1-V(W) A2006WV0-2X10P
2.8 12.0 FILTER_MUTE FILTER_MUTE 1

+-1%
4

1
NC 2

R523
0 11.0 AT+12V AT+12V 3
3

2.7K
REGULATOR AT+5.8V 4
IC502
250V 470P KX

AT+5.8V 5
KIA431A-AT
C514

GND 6
C A REF M_GND

2.2K +-1%
M_GND 7
3 3 2 1 P.CON+32V 3

R525
CAUTION: IS THE LIVE CONNECTION P.CON+32V 8
SH501 11.0 0 2.5
LIGHT_CTL LIGHT_CTL 9
YQ-12
INVERTER_H INVERTER_H 10
S_DET S_DET 11
POWER_ON_H POWER_ON-H 12
AT+12V 13
FROM/TO JACK/OUT AT+5.8V AT+5.8V 14
GND 15
CD502 (CP2201)
E8231001 GND 16
1 GND GND GND 17
2 KEY-B POWER_FAIL POWER_FAIL 18
3 KEY-A KEY-A KEY-A 19
KEY-B
2 KEY-B 20 2
KEY-B
KEY-A
TO/USA

CD3001
E82K1701

PCB240
CEH421
4A 125V

CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD, NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE
ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1 REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE 4A 125V (F501) DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE 1
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
ATTENTION:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST NOTE:THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR.
4A 125V (F501) WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP
IS NON POLAR ONE.
A B C D E F G H
H-31 H-32
 A B C D E F G H

BACKLIGHT INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8

HIGH VOLTAGE
Q7005 FSS275-TL-E

6KV10P SL
33 1/4W 500V0.0022 B
0 S D 12.4

C7030
1

C7018
CN1
0 S D 12.4 CD7005 E82E0604

7
HV 1

C7031

0.01 B
7 7

MA111
D7023
D7003 T7001
0 S D 12.4 NC NC

R7039
8135109G

MA111
D7014

D7019
1SS133 R7049 NC NC
IS_DET1 HV 1
R7035 2.6 G D 12.4 12.4 3.1 NC NC
MA111 10

MA111

R7045
1 8

D7017
LV 2

680
FROM/TO POWER 22 1/4W NC NC
F7001
12.6 0 NC NC
INV+B 2 7
1206FA5A-T VS_DET LV 7
5A 32V 12.6 0 INV_SGND LV 8
3 6
Q7004 FSS275-TL-E NC NC

MA111
D7018

R7046

680
0 S D 12.4 12.4 3.1 NC NC
4 5 D7013

8
R7050 LV 2

MA111
D7020
IS_DET2 NC NC

33 1/4W

25V(32-16)
R7038
MA111 HV 1

C7022
0 S D 12.4 10 NC NC

10 B

0.01 B

MA111
C7032

D7024
2

7
INV_GND NC NC
6 6
CN2
D7006
0 S D 12.4 HV 14

500V 0.0022 B
W809

6
GND POWER ON SW
1SS133

C7017

6KV10P SL
Q7002

C7033
R7036 2.6 G D 12.4

25V(32-16)
POWER_ON_H KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

C7026

10 B
4

5
22 1/4W
W819

12.9 12.8

12.2 HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE

R7015

22K
R7016

4.7K

0 POWER ON SW

1SS133
D7015
Q7001
5.9 KRC103SRTK
0
5 5

INVERTER COTROL IC
IC7001 BD9882FV-E2
2.1 12.8 C7011
20

DUTY VCC
1

25V 1 B
R7009 R7012 1.5 3.1
19

BRT FAIL
2

C7012
47K +-1% 220 +-1%
C7004 1.3 0 0.01 B R7024
18

N1
3

BCT
0.047 B 10
R7010 1.5 0
4 4
17

RT PGND
4

33K +-1%
R7007 R7013 1.7 R7023
0
16

SRT N2
5

150K +-1% 82K +-1% 10

C7003 1.1 0 C7008
15

CT
6

SCP
UDZSNP3.9B
330P CH 0.47 B
R7020

100K

0 C7009
0.001 B

0.001 B
D7011

R7048

R7044
R7054
C7020

C7035

470K
4.7K

1.5K
14

INV GND SS
7

0.1 B
0 3.1 C7010 R7047 D7004 C7024
13

FB REG
8
C7002

0.0047

0.0047

0.1 B
C7007

4.7K 1/4W 1SS133 0.001 B

B
B

0.1
12

IS COMP
9

R7017 R7019 D7005 R7041 D7008

1.5 D7012 IS_DET2
0.1 MA111
10K 10K 1SS133 470K 1SS133
3 3
10

11

VS STB
R7018 9.1 4.8 2.8 10.3 2.8 4.8 9.1
5.1
R7005

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LM2902DR
100

10K

FEED_BACK IC
R7014 Vcc

R7043

6.8K
15K 1/4W
FROM/TO POWER R7011
FEED BACK

IC7002
R7001 R7003 R7008 100K 1/4W 0
LIGHT_CTL D 3.7 Q7003
R7056 GND
2.7K 4.7K 47K G 2SK3018T106
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
R7002

C7001

4.7K
0.1 B
18K

S
1K +-1%

0 9.1 4.8 2.8 0 2.8 4.8 9.1

R7025
0.001 B
R7021

INV_SGND
C7013

4.7K

68K +-1%
R7006

R7030
5.6K

270 +-1%

D7001 R7042 D7007

IS_DET1
R7026

560K 1/4W

2 R7004 2
R7033

1SS133 470K 1SS133

INVERTER_H
1K D7002 C7021

1SS133 0.001 B
100K +-1%

UDZSNP5.6B
R7022

R7032

0.001 B
220

R7040
C7019
0.047 B

470K
R7034

C7015

C7006
2.2 B

D7010
56K
INV_SGND

VS_DET
IS_DET1

PCB240
CEH421
5A 32V

1
CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE 5A 32V(F7001)
CAUTION:F7001 IS MANUFACTURED BY SKYGATE CO.,LTD., TYPE 20N. CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR
1
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES
ATTENTION:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE
N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE 5A 32V(F7001)
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

A B C D E F G H
H-33 H-34
 A B C D E F G H

SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8

7 7

SOUND AMP IC
6 IC301 LA42052-E 6

Ripple
Filter IN1 GND IN2 STB P.P Vcc OUT2 NC GND NC OUT1 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 HEADPHONE JACK
7.4 1.6 0 1.6 1.6 10.3 14.0 7.4 NC 0 NC 7.4 NC R308 J301
15 PJ-364H
1K 1/4W 5
L
4
FROM/TO JACK OUT R309 W823
2
C303
1K 1/4W R310 W820
LOUT
5 C301 1 B
3 5
R304 R306 1K 6
ROUT 16
1 B R
2.2K 2.2K 7
R311
1
R305 R307
1K

16V470 MHE_P

16V470 MHE_P
2.2K 2.2K

C310

C311
FROM/TO POWER
C319 C320
W830
FILTER_MUTE 0.1 B 0.1 B
SPEAKER
W845 R302
POWER_ON_H CD301 E8141801 SP301
4 2.2K S0308F01 4
SP OUT R 1 1
SOUND+B W827
GND 2 2
16V100 MHE_P

6.3V 220 MHE_P

C305 470P CH

C306 470P CH

GND 3 3 SPEAKER
16V470 MHE

SP OUT L 4 4 SP302
4.7 B
C304

C307

C308

C309

W824
S0308F01
HS301
763WSA0064

W803
SOUND_GND
W806

W832

W030
GND

3 3

2 2

PCB240
CEH421

1 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL. DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-35 H-36
 A B C D E F G H

JACK OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

8 (POWER PCB) 8

7 7

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
J8102
MAIN_GND RCA-341H(NI)-09
W833
6 R8118 6

E
AV3_Y

1
100
R8119

E
AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

3
100
R8120

6 H

E
FROM/TO JACK AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

5
CP8101 (CP4301) (OPERATION PCB) 100

100P CH

100P CH
127301123K2

100P CH
R8103

R8105

R8108
C8102

C8105

C8110
LOUT

75
75

75
23 LOUT
FROM/TO POWER
22 GND
ROUT CP2201 (CD502)
21 ROUT
A2001WR2-3P
R2201 R2202
20 GND S_DET R8110 1K 1/4W W822
KEY_A 3
AV3_V/AV1_C[J] R2203 R2204 R2205 R2206
19 AV3_V 1K 820
5 KEY_B 2 5
18 GND 15K 5.6K 5.6K 820 AV1_Y/CBVS1[J] R8111 100
GND 1
17 AV3_U AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]
CH DOWN/STOP

Y
16 GND

VOL DOWN

CH UP/PLAY
EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R

EVQ21505R
POWER
SW2201

SW2202

SW2203

SW2204

SW2205

SW2206

SW2207

SW2208

1
AV3_Y

VOL UP

MENU
EJECT

INPUT
15 AV3_Y

7
14 GND S-DET

6
2
13 AV1_C AV1_C
R8112 100 C
12 GND AV1_C
11 AV1_Y AV1_Y/CBVS1[J] S-VIDEO-IN
PCB270

100P CH

100P CH
J8101

C8103

R8104

R8107
C8109
10 GND CEH422
DIN-417HA-01

75

75
9 YUV L IN YUV_L_IN
8 GND
7 YUV R IN YUV_R_IN
COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN
4 6 GND J8103 4
5 CVBS1 CVBS1 RCA-228H(3)NI-02
4 GND R8113 1K

E
YUV_L_IN

1
3 AV1 L IN AV1_L_IN
R8114 1K

E
2 GND YUV_R_IN

3
1 AV1 R IN AV1_R_IN

470P CH

5
470P CH
(REMOCON PCB)

C8107

C8111
FROM/TO MICON
FROM/TO POWER CVBS_AV_IN
CP7601 (CD6203)
J8104
A2001WV2-5P
R7605 100 RCA-341H(2)NI-06
GND
Vout 1 REMOCON IN 1

E
S_DET CVBS1 R8115 100 V
3 GND 2 GND 2 3

1
R7602 47
B+ 3 AT+3.3V 3
1K

E
AV1_L_IN R8116 L
STANDBY LED 4

3
OS7601
KSM-2003TC2P POWER ON LED 5

6 H

E
AV1_R_IN R8117 1K
220

220

5
6.3V 100 KA

TO SOUND AMP

7
C7602

470P CH

470P CH

470P CH

NC
R8106
C8104

C8106

C8108
R
R7603_1

R7604_1

LOUT

75
ROUT

ST-BY/POWER
R
B

D7601_1
LTL1BECBEK5

2 PCBDA0 2
CEH423

PCB240
CEH421

1 1
NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST
WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

A B C D E F G H
H-37 H-38
 A B C D E F G H

SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
8 8

7 7

(SW PCB)
6 6

SW2
CD2301 ESE22MH22
2H061605
1 GND(SW)
2 PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH
3 FEED MOTOR(-) M M2602
4 FEED MOTOR(+) BCZ3B05
5 SPINDLE MOTOR(-)
6 SPINDLE MOTOR(+) M2601
M JCV9B12
5 5
PCB640
DED020

4 4

3 3

2 2

CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

1 1

A B C D E F G H
H-39 H-40
 A B C D E F G H

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
8 8

23

25

E
IF_OUT1

21 IF_OUT2
NC(BB)

19 IF_AGC
18 IF_OUT

1
8 V_OUT
5 SIF-out
P201-2476-2

1
12 +30V
7 AGC

14 SDA
CD501

15 SCL

20 IF_O
16 AFT
9 +5V

17 +5V

7
NC

NC

NC

11 TU
TU5801 CP4301 CP8101

E
2

2
1

3
LOUT 23 23 LOUT
S-VIDEO-IN

22

24
GND 22 22 GND J8101 J501

6 H

1
5
ROUT 21 21 ROUT
GND 20 20 GND COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN
7 J8102
7
AV3_V 19 19 AV3_V
CVBS_AV_IN
GND 18 18 GND
J8104
AV3_U 17 17 AV3_U
COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN

E
GND 16 16 GND
J8103

1
AV3_Y 15 15 AV3_Y

E
GND 14 14 GND

3
AV1_C 13 13 AV1_C

6 H

E
GND 12 12 GND

5
AV1_Y 11 11 AV1_Y

7
GND 10 10 GND

NC
SUB MICON
CP2801 CP6201 YUV L IN 9 9 YUV L IN
7 D3.3V 1 TX GND 8 8 GND SP301
6 6 PC_TOOL_TX 2 MODE YUV R IN 7 7 YUV R IN
SPEAKER 6
5 PC_TOOL_RX 3 VCC GND 6 6 GND CD301
4 4 CNVSS CVBS1 5 5 CVBS1 SP OUT R 1 1
IIC_OFF
3 5 RX GND 4 4 GND GND 2 2
SDA SP302
2 6 CNVSS AV1 L IN 3 3 AV1 L IN GND 3 3 SPEAKER
SCL
1 7 RESET GND 2 2 GND SP OUT L 4 4
CP2301_1 D_GND
CP8501 CP3002
1 GND 8 GND AV1 R IN 1 1 AV1 R IN
SPDIF-134 1 1 SPDIF-134 POWER PCB
2 F 9 NC
2 ZERO PCB240
GND 2
3 Vref CEH421
ZERO 3 3 GND CP3001 CP501
CD7005

CN1
4 VCC
DVD_A_OUT_R 4 4 DVD_RESET FILTER_MUTE 1 1 FILTER_MUTE
5 E HV 1
GND 5 5 GND 2 2
6 D NC 2
5 DVD_A_OUT_L 6 6 START_SW AT+12V 3 3 AT+12V 5
7 C NC 3
HV 1
DVD RESET 7 7 TX AT+5.8V 4 4 AT+5.8V
8 SW1(DVD/CD) CP2803 NC 4
LV 2
[Y]_VIDEO 8 CD3002 8 DVD_STATUS_1 AT+5.8V 5 5 AT+5.8V
9 VRF(RF_OUT) NC 5
TCK 1
[V]Y_VIDEO 9 9 GND GND 6 6 GND
10 B NC 6
TRST_N 2
[U]C_VIDEO 10 10 P.CON+3.3V M_GND 7 7 M_GND
11 A LV 7
TDO 3
START_SW 11 11 GND P.CON+32V 8 8 P.CON+32V
12 VR(DVD) LV 8
ASEBRKAK_N 4
GND 12 12 P.CON+6V LIGHT_CTL 9 9 LIGHT_CTL
13 VR COM NC 9
TMS 5
SSCTXD/RX 13 13 GND INVERTER_H 10 10 INVERTER_H
14 VR(CD) NC 10 LV 2
TDI 6
SSCRXD/TX 14 14 DVD_A_OUT_R S_DET 11 CD3001 11 S_DET
15 GND NC 11 HV 1
RESET_N 7
15 DVD_A_OUT_L POWER_ON-H 12 12 POWER_ON-H
16 LD(CD) NC 12
FLASH_WP 8

CN2
CP8502 16 [V]Y_VIDEO AT+12V 13 13 AT+12V
17 PD/GND NC 13
ASEMD0 9
GND 1 17 [U]C_VIDEO AT+5.8V 14 14 AT+5.8V
18 LD(DVD) HV 14
GND 10
P.CON+3.3V 2 18 GND GND 15 15 GND
4 19 GND VDD33 11 4
P.CON+3.3V 3 19 RX GND 16 16 GND HIGH VOLTAGE
20 NC
P.CON+12V 4 20 CS GND 17 17 GND
21 T DRV
GND 5 21 P.CON+3.3V POWER_FAIL 18 18 POWER_FAIL HEADPHONE JACK
22 T RTN
P.CON+A5V 6 22 P.CON+12V KEY-A 19 19 KEY-A J301
23 F DRV
P.CON+6V 7 23 P.CON+A5V KEY-B 20 20 KEY-B

CD502
24 F RTN
GND(M) 8 24 GND(M)
DIGITAL PCB

KEY B
KEY A
GND
PCBDH0
CP2302
CEH420
5 CLOSE

R
L
4 OPEN

1
2
3
5
4
2

3
6
7
1
3 GND(D)
2 LD-
3 1 LD+ 3
CD6203 CP7601
REMOCON IN 1 1 REMOCON IN

1
2
3
GND 2 2 GND
CP2303
AT+3.3V 3 3 AT+3.3V
6 SW(GND)

KEY B
KEY A
STANDBY LED 4 4 STANDBY LED

GND
5 LIMIT SW
POWER ON LED 5 5 POWER ON LED

CP2201
4 SLD-
VDD+5V
VDD+5V
VDD+5V

RXCLK+

3 SLD+
RXCLK-

VDD+5V
VDD+5V
RX3+

RX1+
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

GND
RX3-

RX2-

RX0-
RX2+

RX0+

DVD MT PCB
RX1-
NC
NC

NC

NC

NC
NC

2 SP1- COAXIAL
J4301 REMOCON PCB
PCB130

OS7601
CP2804

1 SP1+

1
GND 2
B+ 3
PCBDA0
DMG097
H

E
CEH423

Vout
2

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

OPERATION PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

2 PCB270 2
CEH422
V2801 TM101
LVDS
COMMAND TRANSMITTER
LCD PANEL
CD2804

1
NOTE:THIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST ATTHE TIME
OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
CAUTION:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY
CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES
ARE ATTENTION:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT
DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE 1
DESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES
DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

A B C D E F G H
H-41 H-42
 WAVEFORMS
MICON SOUND AMP
20ns 10us 1ms
200mV 100mV 200mV

1 7 15

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO TUNER

20us 10us 1ms
500mV 0.5V 200mV

2 8 16

FLASH MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP
10us 20ns 10ns
0.5V 200mV 500mV

3 9 52

10us 20ns 100µs

200mV 200mV 500mV

4 10 53

AV SWITCH
20us 2ms 200ns
500mV 100mV 1.0V

5 13 54

MEMORY
100µs
10us 2ms 500mV
100mV 100mV

55
6 14

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured at

the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schemtic diagram.

I-1
 WAVEFORMS
AUDIO/VIDEO
200µs
1.0V

56

200µs
1.0V

57

10µs
200mV

58

10µs
100mV

59

NOTE: The following waveforms were measured

at the point of the corresponding balloon
number in the schematic diagram.

I-2
 MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
110
209
103B
103A 109
111

103C 207
207

207
108
103
207

125 207

102B
208
208
102B
104B
102A
104A 102
207

205 104 PCB270 122

(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y) 120
205 202 PCB130
(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y) 208
202 208
205 PCBDA0
(REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)
106 118

208
208
PCB240
(POWER PCB ASS'Y) 206
107
206
119 123 PCBDH0
208 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y) 206 202 105F 204
208 202 114 105E
117 124
208 201
116 208 105D 203 203 105D
117 208
121 208 116
113
208 208 203 202
208 208
115 208
208 105E
201
101D 203
101E 105D
101G
208

101F 105C
101C 101G

101
105A
105B
101G
101G
101A
105

112
101B

J1-1 J1-2
 MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)

133, 134, 135, 136,137,

CD501, TM101

127
129

127

126

132

130

128 131

128

J1-3
 DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

600 608

601

608

CD2001

M2602

603
606
703
Do not replace the parts. Because,
minute adjustments are needed if
605 this condition is disassembled
702 further more.
703 AA 702 If the repair is needed, replace the
605
607 DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
703
701

602 604
SW2 704
PCB640
(SW PCB ASS'Y)

705
CD2301

CLASS MARK NOTE: Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
GREASE AA

J2-1
 MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
101 AE009877 7A7080011A FRONT CABI ASS'Y
101A AE009878 708WPD0010 CABINET FRONT
101B AE009879 702WNA0010 SHEET SPEAKER-R
101C AE009880 702WNA0009 SHEET SPEAKER-L
101D AE009881 713WPA0426 GLASS LED
101E AE009882 713WPA0431 GLASS LED-2
101F AE009883 761WPA0533 HOLDER PANEL
101G AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET

102 AE009884 7A7020296A BACK CABI ASS'Y

102A AE009885 702WPA1420 CABINET BACK
102B AE009955 800WQ00122 FELT SHEET

103 AE009887 7A7110048A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y

103A AE009888 711WPD0768 PANEL SIDE
103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD
103C AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET

104 AE009889 7A7110049A PLATE BUTTON ASS'Y

104A AE009890 711WPD0769 PLATE BUTTON
104B AE009582 735WPAB101 BUTTON FRAME

105 AE009891 7A7040071A STAND ASS'Y

105A AE009892 704WPA0117 STAND
105B AE009893 761WEA0039 FRAME STAND
105C AE009894 761WSB0072 ANGLE STAND
105D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A
105E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP
105F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND

106 AE009895 752WSA0728 SHIELD DIGITAL

107 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG
108 AE009896 702WPA1421 COVER BACK
109 75006982 706WPAA007 COVER CONNECTOR

110 AE009897 7225490281 SHEET RATING

111 AE009898 7230008445 SHEET JACK
112 AE009899 7235490100 POP LABEL
113 AE009900 724WND0001 SHEET PC-1
114 AE009901 724WND0002 SHEET PC-2
115 AE005122 726000A073 SHEET CAUTION
116 AE009597 744WUA0029 SPRING EARTH-2
117 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3
118 AE009902 752WSA0727 SHIELD JACK
119 AE009816 753WUAA017 SPRING EARTH

120 AE009904 761WPA0532 HOLDER REMOCON

121 AE009905 761WPA0534 COVER DVD
122 AE009906 761WSA0686 ANGLE HINGE
123 AE009907 761WSA0687 ANGLE LCD-L
124 AE009908 761WSA0688 ANGLE LCD-R
125 72782476 800WQ0A100 FELT SHEET
126 AE009909 791WHA0171 LAMIFILM BAG 650*700*0.5MM
127 AE009910 792WHA0759 PACKAGE TOP
128 AE009911 792WHA0760 PACKAGE BOTTOM
129 AE009912 792WHA0766 PACKAGE TOP CENTER

130 AE009913 793WCD1868 GIFT BOX

131 AE009603 794WHA0003 HANDLE
132 AE009604 794WHA0004 HANDLE STOPPER
133 AE009914 J51T0101A INSTRUCTION BOOK(TOSHIBA)
134 AE009609 JB5ND000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)
135 AE007451 J3N51617A REGISTRATION CARD
136 AE007627 J5S10229A INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA
137 AE009915 J51T0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)

201 72784217 810B140A0U SCREW SEMS(B) 4*10 CH

202 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH
203 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH
204 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH
205 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH
206 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH
207 AE009613 8109230A0S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK
208 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH
209 AE009916 8117540C0S SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*30 BK

K1-1
 DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650

601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31

602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y
603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR
604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE
605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F
606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R
607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED
608 BZ710149 800WFAA008 CUSHION C

701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED

702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH
703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH
704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH
705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04

CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102
M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A
PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A
SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22

K2-1
 ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
RESISTORS
! R503 75006901 RC31X1126J RC 12M OHM 1W
! R505 AE009485 R63884330J R,FUSE 33 OHM 1/4W
! R506 AE002150 R803R9333J RC 33K OHM 1/16W
! R509 AE009486 RC31X1125J RC 1.2M OHM 1W
! R510 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W
! R512 AD301018 R002T2104J RC 100K OHM 1/2W
! R544 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W
! R545 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W
! R546 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W
! R547 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W
! R3019 AE009917 R808R9123J RC 12K OHM 1/16W
CAPACITORS
! C501 AE001725 CS0PB0413K CC 0.001 UF 50V B
! C502 AE009490 E8E52C271D CE 270 UF 200V
! C503 79091384 CS0PCH4L2J CC 330 PF 50V CH
! C504 AE009918 E83YF1222D CE 2200 UF 10V
! C505 AE001732 CS0PCH4H1J CC 22 PF 50V CH
! C506 BZ110025 P2122B224M CMP 0.22 UF 275V ECQUL
! C507 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V
! C508 BZ110035 P2122B104M CMP 0.1 UF 275V ECQUL
! C510 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V
! C513 BZ110176 C03L0R7Q2K CC 470 PF 2KV R
! C514 AE000308 CD39B0MQ2K CC 470 PF 250V
C518 AE009492 P332E4223J CPP 0.022 UF 400V
! C520 AE009919 E7ESU54R7M CE 4.7 UF 50V
! C522 AE009920 E83YF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V
! C525 AE009920 E83YF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V
C7030 AE009700 C234SLB11J CC 10 PF 6KV SL
C7033 AE009700 C234SLB11J CC 10 PF 6KV SL
DIODES
! D504 BZ410031 D6CE24110A DIODE VARISTA ENE241D-10A-Q6
! D505 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC
D506 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L
! D507 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC
! D508 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC
D509 AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP33B TE-17
! D510 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC
! D511 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E
D512 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON SARS01-V1
! D514 BZ410126 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON RU3AM-EIC
! D515 AE009803 D28A10A080 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCHS10A08
! D516 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E
D517 AD300070 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77
! D518 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC
D519 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D520 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D521 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D522 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
! D523 AE009829 D28A10A040 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCQ10A04
D526 BZ410113 D97U02201B DIODE ZENER MTZJ22B T-77
D2303 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D2304 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D3004 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L
D3005 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L
D3006 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L
D3007 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L
D3402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D3403 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D4002 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D4003 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D4005 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D4008 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D5803 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D5804 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D6205 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7001 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7002 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7003 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7004 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7005 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7006 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7007 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7008 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7010 AE004795 DE7RB5R62B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP5.6B TE-17
D7011 AE009922 DE7RB3R92B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP3.9B TE-17
DIODES
D7012 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7013 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7014 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7015 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77
D7017 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7018 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7019 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7020 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

K3-1
 ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
DIODES
D7023 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7024 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
D7601 AE009923 0021E91030 LED LTL1BECBEK5
D8510 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)
ICS
! IC301 AE008430 I03SP20520 SOUND AMP 5W 2CH LA42052-E
! IC501 AE009499 ICAD055310 LOW STANDBY POWER IC CONTROL FA5531P-A2
! IC502 AD302211 I1KJ9A431A VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE KIA431A-AT
! IC503 AE009500 I03F9797M0 CHARGE POMP CONTROL LA5797M-TE-L-E
! IC505 AE002809 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC LA6565VR-TLM-E
IC2801 AE009656 I56M069540 SCALER R8J66954BG
IC2802 AE009502 IGGM061600 DDR2-667 256M CL=5 HYB18TC256160BF-3S
IC2804 AE009924 S51T01PF01 MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 32M BOOT EN29LV320AB-70TCP
IC2805 AE009925 S51T01PE01 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K 12C M24256-BWMN6TP
! IC3001 AE009505 I07F091300 1CH DC-DC CONVERTER BD9130NV
! IC3002 AE008435 I1LF010150 DC-DC CONVERTER CONTROLLER AL1015
! IC3003 AE008916 I0GF95ZN10 VO=0.8-3.5V I=1.5A TAPING PQ035ZN1HZPH
! IC3007 AE008431 I07F078200 VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A BD7820FP-E2
! IC3009 AE009506 I5HJ0170B0 REGULATOR VO=3.3V IO=800MA S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG
IC4001 AE009720 ICQK06966A VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP ZR36966ELCG-D-G
IC4005 AE008324 IF9J0164AG 1M*16*4BANK(64M) 143MHZ SDRAM M12L64164A-7TG
IC4007 AE009926 S51T01PF02 MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 16M B00T SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE
IC5801 AE004647 I01FF58320 USA STEREO AN5832SA-E1V
IC6201 79097849 I9UF032290 RESET IC 2.9V TYPE PST3229NR
IC6202 AE009927 S34L01PM02 MEMORY DATA FLASH MICOM ROM16K 2KX2 RAM1 R5F21124FP
IC6551 AE009511 IC1J053580 A/D CONVERTER AK5358A
IC6552 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6553 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6554 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6555 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE
IC6556 AE009928 I55F0A53FU A/V SW 2IN 1OUT TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T)
IC6557 BZ611139 I0QF02534V A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2534V(TE2)
IC6558 BZ611139 I0QF02534V A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2534V(TE2)
IC7001 AE009512 I07F098820 19WLCD INVERTER IC BD9882FV-E2
IC7002 AE009513 I0CF0902D0 QUAND OPERATIONNAL AMPLIFILE LM2902DR
IC8501 AE009365 I0QF045650 DUAL OPEAMP NJM4565M(TE1)
! IC8502 AE009805 I1YF9117A0 VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R
TRANSISTORS
! Q501 72783392 TJXG10NK50 FET STF10NK50Z
Q503 79097796 TPATC03002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103MAT
Q504 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
Q505 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK
Q2301 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
Q2302 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
Q3001 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
Q3002 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK
Q3003 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
Q3004 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
Q3005 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
Q3006 AE005049 TNAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC101S-RTK
! Q3007 AE008441 TAAA01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y-RTF/P
Q3008 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
! Q3009 AE008933 TJ5MC61080 FET TPC6108
! Q3010 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR
! Q3011 AE008933 TJ5MC61080 FET TPC6108
Q3407 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
Q4301 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK
Q5801 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q5802 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q6201 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q6202 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL
Q6203 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK
Q6204 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK
Q7001 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK
! Q7002 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P
Q7003 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106
! Q7004 AE009929 TJ3MSS2750 FET FSS275-TL-E
! Q7005 AE009929 TJ3MSS2750 FET FSS275-TL-E
COILS &TRANSFORMERS
! L501 AE005143 029X000416 COIL,LINE FILTER SS24H-10100
L503 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L504 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH
L3001 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L3002 AE009517 0218MG5R2P COIL 5.2 UH
L3003 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L3004 AE009518 0218MG220P COIL 22 UH
L3005 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH
L5801 72784092 0216SD220J COIL 22 UH
L5805 AE009260 021AS9224J COIL 0.22 UH
L8501 AE008874 0216SD2R2J COIL 2.2 UH
L8502 AE006570 0216SD1R0J COIL 1 UH
! T501 AE009520 0481240018 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81240018

K3-2
 ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
COILS &TRANSFORMERS
! T7001 AE009521 048135109G TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 8135109G
JACKS
! J301 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H
! J501 AE009523 064Q1A0010 JACK,AC CCT2302-0901C
J4301 AE009524 060R401140 RCA JACK RCA-101HT(OR)
J8101 AE009526 062R750007 PLUG DIN-417HA-01
J8102 AE009527 060R411058 RCA JACK RCA-341H(NI)-09
J8103 AE009528 060R431039 RCA JACK RCA-228H(3)NI-02
J8104 AE009529 060R431040 RCA JACK RCA-341H(2)NI-06
SWITCHES
SW2201 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2202 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2203 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2204 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2205 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2206 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2207 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
SW2208 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R
P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PCB130 AE009931 A51T01P130 DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMG097A
PCB240 AE009932 A51T01P240 POWER PCB ASS'Y CEH421A
PCB270 AE009933 A51T01P270 OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEH422A
PCBDA0 AE009934 A51T01PDA0 REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEH423A
PCBDH0 AE009935 A51T01PDH0 DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEH420A
MISCELLANEOUS
B501 BZ310129 024HT03564 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0
B2305 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B2800 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B2803 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2804 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2805 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2806 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2807 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2808 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2809 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2810 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2811 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20
B2815 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B2816 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B2817 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B2820 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B2821 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B2822 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B3003 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3004 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3005 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3006 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3007 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3008 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3014 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3015 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3017 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B3022 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B3023 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B4001 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4002 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4003 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4005 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4006 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4008 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4010 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4015 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4016 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B4301 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06
B4302 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06
B5801 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B5802 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B5803 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B5804 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06
B6551 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20
B6552 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B6553 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02
B6554 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06
B6556 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20
B8501 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D
B8502 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
B8503 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D
B8504 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45
BT001 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)
BT002 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)
CD301 AE009733 06E8141801 CORD CONNECTOR E8141801
! CD501 AE009538 120Q119905 CORD SET AC P201-2476-2
CD502 AE009936 06E8231001 CORD CONNECTOR E8231001

K3-3
 ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description
MISCELLANEOUS
CP501 AE009937 069S2K0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X10P
CD2804 AE009938 06CHRU1803 CORD CONNECTOR CHRU1803
CD3001 AE009939 06E82K1701 CORD CONNECTOR E82K1701
CD3002 AE009940 06E82O1101 CORD CONNECTOR E82O1101
CD6203 AE009941 06E8252002 CORD CONNECTOR E8252002
CD7005 AE009942 06E82E0604 CORD CONNECTOR E82E0604
CP2201 AD301795 069S230639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-3P
CP2301 AE008156 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03
CP2302 AE009544 069EV5T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_105_015_800+
CP2303 AE009545 069EV6T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_106_015_800+
CP2801 BZ614485 069S270629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-7P
CP2803 BZ614214 069S2B0629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-11P
CP2804 AE009548 069S2U0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X15P
CP3001 AE009937 069S2K0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X10P
CP3002 AE009944 069S2O0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X12P
CP4301 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1
CP6201 BZ614458 069S290629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-9P
CP7601 AD300752 069S250629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-5P
CP8101 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2
CP8501 AE009553 06GG2E0019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR-14A
CP8502 AD301796 069S280629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-8P
CUS151 BZ710279 800WFAA006 CUSHION A
EL2401 BZ614043 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD
! F501 79101691 081PC04005 FUSE 51MS040L
! F7001 AE004626 083LA05007 FUSE 1206FA5A-T
FH501 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY
FH502 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY
NR2801 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV
NR2802 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV
NR2803 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV
NR2804 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV
NR2805 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV
NR2806 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV
NR2807 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV
NR2808 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV
NR2809 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV
NR2810 AE009556 11074220M7 R,NETWORK CRA108220JV
NR2811 AE009556 11074220M7 R,NETWORK CRA108220JV
NR3601 AE009945 110P4472M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0472TCE
NR3602 AE009945 110P4472M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0472TCE
NR6551 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV
OS7601 AE009947 077Q038007 REMOTE RECEIVER KSM-2003TC2P
SH501 AE009776 126D000045 TERMINAL PIN YQ-12
! SP301 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01
! SP302 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01
! TH501 AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR 5D2-08LCS
TM101 AE009560 076D0LT030 TRANSMITTER 000-103000530
! TU5801 AE009623 0164100027 DIGITAL TUNER ENG36E18KRF
! V2801 AE009948 09EV115008 LCD M156B1-L02
X2801 AE009563 100GT02728 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000B030
X2802 AE009564 100GT02509 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C25000H025
X4001 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029
X6201 75006971 100GT01615 CRYSTAL B16000E007
X6551 AE009567 100DT01217 CRYSTAL DS0321SRAB

RESISTOR
RC............... CARBON RESISTOR

CAPACITORS
CC............... CERAMIC CAPACITOR
CE............... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR
CP............... POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CPP............. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
CPL............. PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMP............ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CMPL.......... METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMPP.......... METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K3-4
 TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN